HomeMy WebLinkAboutThe Olivia - Project Manual - Vol 1
HONORS COLLEGE AND RESIDENCES 08/18/14 – GMP PRICING DOCUMENTS PACKAGE Page - 1
BID PACKAGE NO. 2
DECEMBER 22, 2014
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN
LUXURY RESIDENCE AND SHOPPES
CARMEL, INDIANA
CSO PROJECT # 12043
ARCHITECT:
CSO Architects, Inc.
8831 Keystone Crossing, Indianapolis, IN 46240
T (317) 848.7800 F (317) 574.0957
STRUCTURAL ENGINEER:
Lynch Harrison & Brumleve, Inc.
550 Virginia Avenue, Indianapolis, IN 46203
T (317) 423.1550 F (317) 423.1551
LANDSCAPE DESIGN:
Context, LLC
12 South Main Street, Suite 200, Fortville, IN 46040
T (317) 485.6900
CIVIL ENGINEER:
American Structurepoint, Inc.
7260 Shadeland Station, Indianapolis, IN 46256
T (317) 547.5580 F (317) 543.0270
MEP ENGINEERS:
Circle Design Group, Inc.
5510 South East Street, Suite F, Indianapolis, IN 46227
T (317) 781.6200 F (317) 781.6201
12043 00 01 10 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN TABLE OF CONTENTS
NOTE: SPECIFICATION ITALICS/BOLD WERE PREVIOUSLY ISSUED AS PART OF BID PACKAGE
NO. 1
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION
00 00 00 COVER
00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS
PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 41 19 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 54 13 GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY
04 72 00 CAST STONE MASONRY
DIVISION 05 - METALS
05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
05 31 00 STEEL DECKING
05 40 00 METAL STUD FRAMING
05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS
05 51 00 METAL STAIRS
05 52 13 RAILINGS
DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTIC
06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 16 00 SHEATHING
06 17 53 SHOP FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
06 20 13 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
06 43 00 WOOD STAIRS AND RAILINGS
06 46 00 WOOD TRIM
06 48 00 WOOD FRAMES
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION
07 24 00 EXTERIOR FINISH AND INSULATION SYSTEM (EFIS)
07 25 00 WEATHER BARRIERS
07 46 00 SIDING AND SYNTHETIC WOOD TRIM
07 54 23 EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING (ADHERED)
07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 71 00 ROOF SPECIALTIES
07 72 00 ROOF ACCESSORIES
07 84 13 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
07 84 46 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS
12043 00 01 10 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN TABLE OF CONTENTS
NOTE: SPECIFICATION ITALICS/BOLD WERE PREVIOUSLY ISSUED AS PART OF BID PACKAGE
NO. 1
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08 31 13 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
08 36 13 SECTIONAL DOORS
08 41 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
08 53 13 VINYL WINDOWS AND DOORS
08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE
08 80 00 GLAZING
08 91 19 FIXED LOUVERS
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
09 21 16 GYPSUM SHAFT ASSEMBLIES
09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD
09 30 00 TILING
09 65 16 RESLIENT FLOORING AND ACCESSORIES
09 68 13 CARPETING
9 91 00 PAINTING
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
NO SECTIONS
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT
NO SECTIONS
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12 35 30 RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
NO SECTIONS
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS
14 21 00 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
DIVISION 31– EARTHWORK
31 10 00 SITE CLEARING
31 20 00 EARTH MOVING
31 23 19 DEWATERING
31 31 16 TERMITE CONTROL
31 62 25 RAMMED AGGREGATE PIERS
12043 00 01 10 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN TABLE OF CONTENTS
NOTE: SPECIFICATION ITALICS/BOLD WERE PREVIOUSLY ISSUED AS PART OF BID PACKAGE
NO. 1
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
DIVISION 32– SITE WORK
32 12 16 ASPHALT PAVING
32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING
32 13 73 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 33– UTILITIES
33 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES
33 11 00 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
33 31 00 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS
33 41 00 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING
33 46 00 SUBDRAINAGE
12043 02 41 19 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
SECTION 02 41 19 – SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTIONS INCLUDES
A. Methods and procedures for demolishing, salvaging, recycling and removing sitework items and
portions of building and structure designated to be removed in whole or in part, and for
backfilling resulting trenches and excavations.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule of Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition activities, with starting and ending
dates for each activity.
2. Interruption of utility services. If applicable, indicate how long utility services will
be interrupted.
3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services with Owner
and appropriate utility authority.
B. Hazardous Materials: If applicable, provide description of Hazardous Materials and
Notification of Filing with proper authorities prior to beginning of Work as required.
C. Submit information indicating:
1. Descriptions of and anticipated quantities of materials to be salvaged, reused,
recycled and landfilled.
2. Schedule of selective demolition.
D. Submit copies of certified weigh bills, bills of landing from authorized disposal sites and
reuse and recycling facilities for material removed from upon request from Owner’s
Representative.
E. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility
licensed to accept hazardous waste.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Pre-demolition conference conducted at project site one week prior to beginning work of
this section to:
1. Verify project requirements.
2. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.
3. Review and discuss demolition schedule, personnel, equipment, etc.
4. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.
B. Arrange for site visit with Owner’s Representative to examine existing site conditions
adjacent to demolition work, prior to start of Work. Notify Engineer of any discrepancies.
1. Ensure key personnel, site supervisor, project manager, subcontractor
representatives attend.
12043 02 41 19 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect existing items designated to remain and items designated for salvage. In event of
damage to such items, immediately replace or make repairs to approval of Owner’s
Representative and at no cost to Owner’s Representative.
B. Remove and store materials to be salvaged, in manner to prevent damage.
C. Store and protect in accordance with requirements for maximum preservation of material.
1.5 SITE CONDITIONS
A. In all circumstances ensure that demolition work does not adversely affect adjacent water
courses groundwater and wildlife, or contribute to excess air and noise pollution.
B. Do not dispose, of waste or volatile materials such as mineral spirits, oil, petroleum based
lubricants, or toxic cleaning solutions into watercourses, storm or sanitary sewers.
Ensure proper disposal procedures are maintained throughout project.
C. Do not pump water containing suspended materials into watercourses, storm or sanitary
sewers, or onto adjacent properties.
D. Control disposal or runoff of water containing suspended materials or other harmful
substances in accordance with local authorities.
E. Protect trees, plants and foliage on site and adjacent properties where indicated.
1.6 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Prior to start of any demolition work remove contaminated or hazardous materials as
defined by authorities having jurisdiction from site and dispose of at designated disposal
facilities
1.7 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP
A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.
1.8 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site
unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled
B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to
prevent damage, and deliver to Owner.
C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and
reinstall where indicated.
D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently
removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or
removed and reinstalled.
12043 02 41 19 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Inspect site with Owner’s Representative and verify extent and location of items
designated for removal, disposal, alternative disposal, recycling, salvage and items to
remain.
B. Locate and protect utilities. Preserve active utilities traversing site in operating condition.
C. Notify and obtain approval of utility companies before starting demolition.
D. Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits prior to commencing demolition work.
3.2 REMOVAL OPERATIONS
A. Items indicated for removal are based upon survey data, previous design plans and/or
asbuilt drawings. Contractor to completely remove all items to the extents required to
facilitate proposed construction. Portions of items indicated to be removed may be buried
below grade; any partially buried items should be completely removed without additional
compensation. If additional buried items are discovered during demolition or construction
that conflict with the proposed improvements, the Engineer should be notified
immediately. Additional authorized removal as directed by the Engineer will be paid for
according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.
B. Remove items as indicated. Transport demolished materials off Owner’s property and
legally dispose of them. Do not allow demolished material to accumulate on-site.
Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
C. Comply with all specification requirements pertaining to construction waste and
management disposal.
D. Do not disturb items designated to remain in place.
E. Removal of Pavements, Curbs and Gutters
1. Square up adjacent surfaces to remain in place by saw cutting or other method
approved by Engineer.
2. Protect adjacent joints and load transfer devices.
3. Protect underlying and adjacent granular material.
4. Some concrete pavements and curbs indicated to be removed may contain
reinforcement (dowels, rebar, welded wire fabric, etc.). Pavement indicated for
removal includes completely removing all reinforcement and properly disposing of
waste offsite.
F. When removing pipes under existing or future pavement area, excavate at least 12
inches below pipe invert.
G. Piping to be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug
remaining piping with same or compatible pipe material.
H. Piping to Be Abandoned In Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same
12043 02 41 19 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
compatible material.
I. Equipment to be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
J. Equipment to be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,
clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment
operational.
K. Equipment to be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove
equipment and deliver to Owner.
L. Decommission water wells and monitoring wells in accordance with all Local, State, and
Federal guidelines and regulations.
M. Walls, Enclosures, and Structures to be Removed: Completely remove all items to the
extents required to facilitate construction, including but not limited to foundations, footers,
reinforcement, subdrainage piping, etc.
N. Sealing
1. Seal pipe ends and walls of manholes or catch basins as required. Securely plug
to form watertight seal.
O. Backfill
1. Backfill trenches and excavations as required in Division 31 Section Earth
Moving. Granular backfill to be utilized below existing and proposed pavements,
buildings, and sidewalk areas and within 5 feet of said areas.
3.3 RESTORATION
A. Restore areas of demolition to match conditions of adjacent, undisturbed areas.
B. Use soil treatments and procedures which are not harmful to health, are not injurious to
plants, and do not endanger wildlife, adjacent water courses or ground water.
3.4 CLEAN UP
A. Upon completion of work, remove debris, trim surfaces and leave work site clean.
B. Use cleaning solutions and procedures which are not harmful to health, are not injurious
to plants, and do not endanger wildlife, adjacent water courses or ground water.
END OF SECTION 02 41 19
12043 033000 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials,
mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:
1. Footings.
2. Foundation walls.
3. Slabs-on-grade.
4. Suspended slabs.
5. Building frame members.
6. Building walls.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.
2. Section 32 13 13 "Concrete Paving" for concrete pavement and walks.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with fly subject to compliance
with requirements.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when
characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances
warrant adjustments.
C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings
1. Submit the proposed Shop Drawing Submittal Schedule prior to submitting any of the
shop drawings for review.
2. Shop drawings giving details of fabrication and placing shall be prepared by the supplier
and submitted to the Engineer for his review.
3. Shop drawings shall be checked by the Architect/Engineer for correct interpretation of the
Drawings; however this check shall not relieve the Contractor of his primary responsibility
to provide the correct number of properly detailed bars in all members.
4. Shop drawings shall be prepared in accordance with the following:
a. Beams and Walls: ¼ inch scale elevations of all walls and beams shall be
provided with all the reinforcing shown on the elevations, not scheduled.
b. Slabs and mats: Reinforcing for all concrete slabs shall be shown on a plan drawn
exclusively for this use. Reinforcing shall not be scheduled.
12043 033000 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
c. Slabs and mats: A support system plan for all slabs shall be provided. Supports
for slab top and bottom bars shall be shown in number and location. The
maximum spacing of support bars shall be 4’-0”. The maximum overhang beyond
a support bar or slab bolster shall be 1’-0”.
d. Columns: Full height elevations for all columns shall be provided with all floor and
foundation elevations marked.
e. Bar bending diagrams shall be provided for all bent bars (within a submittal) in that
same submittal.
f. Sections of walls, beams, slabs, etc. shall be provided showing clearly bar
positions and clearances to forms.
g. On wall sections, indicate spacers used to maintain clearances for vertical wall
steel.
h. Beam bolsters and chairs shall be indicated as to size and spacing on the sections
and elevations.
i. Shop drawings shall include all details, sections, and installation instructions
indicated on the structural drawings that are required by the Contractor to place
the reinforcement without using the structural drawings.
5. Submit the following regarding the mechanical tension butt splices, the end-bearing
splices, dowel bar replacements, and rebar anchorage systems:
a. Shop drawings indicating fabrication and placement details per this section.
b. Manufacturer’s literature, product samples, and certified test reports substantiating
compliance with the Specification.
D. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional
engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork.
1. Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping
formwork, shoring removal, and reshoring installation and removal.
E. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the
structure.
1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Engineer of Record.
F. Samples: For waterstops, and vapor retarder.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer, Ready Mix Concrete manufacturer and Testing Agency.
B. Welding certificates.
C. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:
1. Cementitious materials.
2. Admixtures.
3. Form materials and form-release agents.
4. Steel reinforcement and accessories.
5. Fiber reinforcement.
6. Waterstops.
7. Curing compounds.
8. Bonding agents.
12043 033000 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
9. Adhesives.
10. Vapor retarders.
11. Joint-filler strips.
12. Repair materials.
D. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance
with requirements:
1. Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of
concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity.
E. Field quality-control reports.
F. Minutes of preinstallation conference.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-
certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete
Flatwork Technician.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete
products and that complies with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and
equipment.
1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete
Production Facilities."
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing
Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.
2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing
Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency
laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician -
Grade II.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from
the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures
from single source from single manufacturer.
E. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4 "Structural
Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."
F. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract
Documents:
1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5 and Section 7,
"Lightweight Concrete."
2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
G. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material
evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.
12043 033000 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine
procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each
entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:
a. Contractor's superintendent.
b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.
c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.
d. Concrete subcontractor.
e. Architect or Engineer.
2. Review testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete
finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing procedures,
construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips, forms and form removal
limitations, shoring and reshoring procedures, vapor-retarder installation, anchor rod and
anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, floor and slab
flatness and levelness measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete
protection.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and
damage.
B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other
contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and
smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.
2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1,
and as follows:
a. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.
B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.
Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic,
paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not
exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist
plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.
D. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.
E. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.
12043 033000 - 5
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
F. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,
stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of
concrete surfaces.
1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
G. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic
form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of
concrete on removal.
1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed
concrete surface.
2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in
concrete surface.
3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive damp proofing
or waterproofing.
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615 Grade 60 deformed.
B. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82 as drawn.
C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel
wire into flat sheets.
2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615 Grade 60 plain-steel bars, cut true to length with ends square
and free of burrs.
Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and
fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports
from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice,"
of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:
1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms,
use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar
supports.
B. Provide Aztec “space wheels” to maintain clearances for vertical reinforcement.
2.4 MECHANICAL TENSION BUTT SPLICES
A. Mechanical tension butt splices shall conform to ACI 318-08.
B. Provide Cadweld butt splices or position threaded couplers for hooked bars that must be butt
spliced.
C. Standards:
1. Lenton Rebar Splicing, Erico Products, Inc.
2. Grip Twist System, Dayton Barsplice, Inc.
3. MRC 150 Mechanical Reinforcement Connector System, Dayton-Superior.
4. Cadweld, C-Series, Erico Products, Inc.
2.5 END-BEARING SPLICES (COMPRESSION BUTT SPLICES)
12043 033000 - 6
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
A. Dowel bar replacement system shall conform to ACI 318-08, Section 12.16.4.
B. Standards:
1. G-Loc, Gateway Erectors, Inc.
2. Speed Sleeve, Erico Products, Inc.
2.6 DOWEL BAR REPLACEMENT SYSTEM
A. Dowel bar replacement system shall conform to ACI 318-08.
B. Standards:
1. DB-SAE Dowel Bar Splicer, Richmond Screw Anchor Company
2. Dowel Bar Replacement System, Dayton-Superior.
3. Lenton Form Saver, Erico Products, Inc.
4. Systems, Intersect, Dayton-Superior.
2.7 REBAR ANCHORAGE SYSTEM
A. Rebar anchorage system shall conform to ACI 318-08.
B. Standards:
1. Lenton Terminator, Erico Products, Inc.
2. MRC D-156 Structural Rebar End, Dayton-Superior.
2.8 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and
source, throughout Project:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III gray. Supplement with the following:
a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618 Class F or C. Maximum loss of ignition to be 3.0 percent.
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3M coarse aggregate or better, graded.
Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10
years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar
aggregates and cementitious materials.
1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size 1 inch nominal.
2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330, 1/2-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.
D. Water: ASTM C 94 and potable.
2.9 ADMIXTURES
A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in
hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.
12043 033000 - 7
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type B.
3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F.
5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type G.
6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017, Type II.
2.10 FIBER REINFORCEMENT
C. Synthetic Micro-Fiber: Polypropylene micro-fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete,
complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements:
a. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Fiberstrand 150.
b. FORTA Corporation; Econo-Mono.
c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; Grace MicroFiber.
d. Propex Concrete Systems Corp.; Fibermesh 150.
2.11 WATERSTOPS
A. Self-Expanding Butyl Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, butyl
rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive bonding to concrete,
3/4 by 1 inch.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements
a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.; MiraSTOP.
b. CETCO; Volclay Waterstop-RX.
c. Concrete Sealants Inc.; Conseal CS-231.
d. Greenstreak; Swellstop.
e. Henry Company, Sealants Division; Hydro-Flex.
f. JP Specialties, Inc.; Earth Shield Type 20.
2.12 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A, except with maximum perm rating of 0.036.
Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements
a. Insulation Solutions, Inc.; Viper II 10 mil (0.021 perms).
b. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Perminator 10 mil (0.024 perms)..
c. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn 10 mil Green (0.027 perms).
d. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap10 mil Class A (0.036 perms).
2.13 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application
to fresh concrete.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements:
12043 033000 - 8
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
a. Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; CATEXOL CimFilm.
b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Confilm.
c. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Aquafilm.
d. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film (J-74).
e. Edoco by Dayton Superior; BurkeFilm.
f. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Eucobar.
g. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-CON.
h. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; EVAPRE.
i. Sika Corporation; SikaFilm.
j. Symons by Dayton Superior; Finishing Aid.
B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.
C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
D. Water: Potable.
E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,
dissipating.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements:
a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure 200.
b. Conspec by Dayton Superior; W.B. Resin Cure.
c. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W).
d. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Res X Cure WB.
e. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Kurez W VOX; TAMMSCURE
WB 30C.
f. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R.
g. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100-CLEAR.
h. Symons by Dayton Superior; Resi-Chem Clear.
2.14 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips:
1. Closed-cell polyethylene for interior applications.
2. Homasote Homez 300 or self-expanding cork, ASTM D1752, Type III for exterior
applications.
B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene
butadiene.
C. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing
and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit
requirements, and as follows:
1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to
hardened concrete.
D. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, not less than 0.034 inch thick, with bent
tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or
debris.
12043 033000 - 9
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
2.15 REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be
applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor
elevations.
1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement
as defined in ASTM C 219.
2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions,
and application.
3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as
recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M.
B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be
applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match
adjacent floor elevations.
1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement
as defined in ASTM C 219.
2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and
application.
3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as
recommended by topping manufacturer.
4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109.
2.16 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of
laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture
designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.
B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than
portland cement in concrete as follows:
1. Fly Ash: 20 percent with the exception of slabs scheduled to receive adhered flooring,
which shall be limited to 15 percent.
C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.06 percent by weight of
cement.
D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as
required, for placement and workability.
2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low
humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial
slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a
water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.
12043 033000 - 10
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
2.17 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS
A. Footings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength 3000 psi at 28 days.
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.58.
3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.
B. Foundation and Building Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.
3. Slump Limit: 5 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.
C. Interior Slabs-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.
2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 530 lb/cu. yd.
3. Slump Limit: 5 inches plus or minus 1 inch.
4. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent.
5. Synthetic Micro-Fiber: 1.5 lb/cu. yd. for slabs on grade.
D. Exterior Slabs on Grade (Parking Garage Slabs on Grade):
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (at 28 days.
2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 530 lb/cu. yd.
3. Air Content: 4.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-inch nominal
maximum aggregate size.
4. Synthetic Micro-Fiber: 1.5 lb/cu. yd. for slabs on grade.
E. Exterior Balcony Slabs on Wood Framing: Proportion structural lightweight concrete mixture as
follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.
2. Calculated Equilibrium Unit Weight 110 lb/cu. ft. plus or minus 3 lb/cu. ft. as determined
by ASTM C 567.
3. Slump Limit: 5 inches plus or minus 1 inch. weather, or deicer chemicals.
4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for nominal
maximum aggregate size greater than 3/8 inch.
F. Podium Slab and Frame Members: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.
3. Slump Limit: 5 inches plus or minus 1 inch.
G. Building Columns: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 5000 psi at 28 days.
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: .40.
3. Slump Limit: 5 inches plus or minus 1 inch.
2.18 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
12043 033000 - 11
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
2.19 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to
ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information.
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from
1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and
delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,
lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure
can support such loads.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:
1. Class B, ¼ inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces.
2. Class D, 1 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces.
D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.
Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide
top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.
1. Install keyways, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required
elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support
screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork
is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to
prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous
locations.
H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads
required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.
J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt,
and other debris just before placing concrete.
K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and
maintain proper alignment.
12043 033000 - 12
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, before placing reinforcement.
3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work
that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with
tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
Bridges."
2. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.
3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does
not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50
deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged
by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations need to be maintained.
1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, slabs, and other structural elements that support weight
of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least .75 percent of its 28-day design
compressive strength.
2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without
loosening or disturbing shores.
B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or
otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply
new form-release agent.
C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.
Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete
surfaces unless approved by Architect.
3.4 SHORES AND RESHORES
A. Comply with ACI 318 and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring.
1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.
2. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate
and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or
deflection.
3.5 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to
ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturers recommended tape.
12043 033000 - 13
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
3.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that
would reduce bond to concrete.
C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and
support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld
crossing reinforcing bars.
1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4, where indicated.
D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to
minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset
laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with
wire.
3.7 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at
locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across
construction joints unless otherwise indicated.
2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete.
3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in
girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection.
4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and
girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.
5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with
walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.
6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or
partially hardened concrete surfaces.
C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning
concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-
fourth of concrete thickness as follows:
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing
each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after
applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch wide joints into concrete when cutting
action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops
random contraction cracks.
12043 033000 - 14
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab
junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and
other locations, as indicated.
1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished
concrete surface unless otherwise indicated.
2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below
finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint
Sealants," are indicated.
3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is
required, lace or clip sections together.
E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate
or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.
3.8 WATERSTOPS
A. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated,
according to manufacturer's written instructions, adhesive bonding, mechanically fastening, and
firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable.
3.9 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items
is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless
approved by Engineer
C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new
concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of
weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated.
Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures
and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6
inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that
have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time
necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other
embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.
D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of
construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.
1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked
around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
3. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
12043 033000 - 15
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
E. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from
physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low
temperatures.
1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three
successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature
range required by ACI 301.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete
on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.
F. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:
1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing
water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of
ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is
Contractor's option.
2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
3.10 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes
and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified
limits on formed-surface irregularities.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces (not exposed to public view).
B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in
an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and
defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface
irregularities.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, or scheduled to receive a rubbed
finish.
C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where
indicated:
1. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick
paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement to one and one-
half parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white
portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match
adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout
whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36
hours.
D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent
formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across
adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
12043 033000 - 16
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
3.11 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and
finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B. Screeding:
1. Immediately after placing, strike off excess concrete with a straightedge to bring the top
surface to proper grade, aligning it to the contours of the screeds.
2. Screed off edge forms, intermediate screed strips or pipe set accurately and firmly to the
required elevations and contours for the finished surface.
3. Move straightedge across the concrete surface with a sawing motion, advancing forward
a short distance with each movement. There should be a surplus of concrete against the
front face of the straightedge to fill in low areas as the straightedge passes over the
surface.
4. Complete screeding before any excess moisture or bleed water is present on the surface.
C. Bull Floating or Leveling:
1. Immediately after screeding, bull float the concrete surface, eliminating high and low
spots, smoothing the surface and embedding the coarse aggregate.
2. Avoid overworking the concrete. Do not close up or seal the surface of the concrete.
3. Complete bull floating before any excess moisture or bleed water is present on the
surface.
D. Floating:
1. Begin floating operations when bleed water has disappeared or been removed from the
surface and when the surface has stiffened to support the operation. Do not use dry
cement and sand to take up the bleed water.
2. Hand or power float the concrete surface, removing slight imperfections and producing a
relatively even and true surface with a uniform, sandy texture prepared for final finishing.
3. Avoid overworking the concrete. Do not close up or seal the surface of the concrete.
4. Where a float finish is the specified final finish (structural slab beneath housing and plaza
and topping slab beneath the plaza paver system), finish level slabs to a true plane with a
tolerance of ¼” inch in 10 feet as determined by a 10 foot straightedge placed anywhere
on the slab in any direction. Finish supported and sloping slabs to a comparable precision
unless otherwise specified.
E. Final Finishing.
1. Broom Finish: Slip resistant surfaces.
a. Immediately after floating, draw a broom across the concrete surface transversely to
the main direction of traffic, producing a coarse, scored, slip-resistant texture.
2. Trowel Finish:
a. Immediately after floating, use power trowel for first trowelling to produce a smooth
surface relatively free of defects.
b. For first trowelling, use hand trowelling in areas inaccessible to power trowelling.
c. Use hand trowel and heavy pressure for final trowelling after concrete has become
hard enough to produce a ringing sound as the trowel is moved over the surface.
Produce a smooth, hard, dense surface, uniform in texture and appearance and free
of defects.
12043 033000 - 17
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
d. Finish level slabs on grade and topping slab over podium to a true plane with a
tolerance of 3/16 inch in 10 feet as determined by a 10 foot straightedge placed
anywhere on the slab in any direction. Finish supported and sloping slabs to a
comparable precision unless otherwise specified.
3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in
place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with
in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to
complete the Work.
B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still
green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and
terminations slightly rounded.
C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations
as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations,
complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and
equipment.
D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated
items. Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel
finish concrete surfaces.
3.13 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-
weather protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry,
or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during
finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing,
screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported
slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after
loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the
remainder of the curing period.
D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed
surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.
E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:
a. Water.
b. Continuous water-fog spray.
c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
12043 033000 - 18
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining
cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped
at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than
seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover
material and waterproof tape.
a. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining
cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with
bonding of floor covering used on Project.
3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy
rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and
repair damage during curing period.
a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without
damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound
manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with
bonding of floor covering used on Project.
3.14 JOINT FILLING
A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month. Do not fill joints until
construction traffic has permanently ceased.
B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact
faces of joint clean and dry.
3.15 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove
and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.
B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two
and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling
and placing.
C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,
spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and
stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than
1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of
cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes
and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding
agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place
with bonding agent.
2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and
standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding
color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match
before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher
than surrounding surface.
12043 033000 - 19
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and
structural performance as determined by Architect.
D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and
verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces
sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.
1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,
honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that
penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of
width, and other objectionable conditions.
2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing
operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired
areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment.
Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's
written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather
edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low
areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor
elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to
manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level
surface.
6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter,
by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean,
square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around.
Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent.
Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without
coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete.
Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar.
Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and
loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place
patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to
match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive
and patching mortar.
F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's
approval.
3.17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform
field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Inspections:
1. Steel reinforcement placement.
2. Steel reinforcement welding.
12043 033000 - 20
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
3. Headed bolts and studs.
4. Verification of use of required design mixture.
5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.
6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.
7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and
slabs.
C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to
ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or
fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.
a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests
for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly
selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not
less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests
when concrete consistency appears to change.
3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; ASTM C 173,
volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite
sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.
4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F
and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.
5. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test
for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each
concrete mixture.
6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31.
a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each
composite sample.
7. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; test one set of two laboratory-cured
specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.
a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set
of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age
indicated.
8. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-
cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures
for protecting and curing in-place concrete.
9. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three
consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive
strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive
strength by more than 500 psi.
10. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and
Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain
Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete
testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive
strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking
strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.
12043 033000 - 21
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
11. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may
be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of
concrete.
12. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete
when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other
requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting
agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders
complying with ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by Architect.
13. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
14. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply
with the Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION 03 3000
12043 035413 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 ISSUED 12/22/2014
SECTION 03 54 13 - GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes gypsum-cement-based, self-leveling underlayment for application below
interior floor coverings.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of underlayment and floor-covering systems
certifying that products are compatible.
C. Minutes of preinstallation conference.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Installer who is approved by manufacturer for application of
underlayment products required for this Project.
B. Product Compatibility: Manufacturers of underlayment and floor-covering systems certify in
writing that products are compatible.
C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide gypsum-cement underlayment systems
identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing
agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of
another qualified testing agency.
D. Sound Transmission Characteristics: Where indicated, provide gypsum-cement underlayment
systems identical to those of assemblies tested for STC and IIC ratings per ASTM E 90 and
ASTM E 492 by a qualified testing agency.
12043 035413 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 ISSUED 12/22/2014
E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration from
moisture or other detrimental effects.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate
temperature, ventilation, ambient temperature and humidity, and other conditions affecting
underlayment performance.
1. Place gypsum-cement-based underlayments only when ambient temperature and
temperature of substrates are between 50 and 80 deg F.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate application of underlayment with requirements of floor-covering products and
adhesives, to ensure compatibility of products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GYPSUM-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENTS
A. Underlayment: Gypsum-cement-based, self-leveling product that can be applied in minimum
uniform thickness of 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor
elevations.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Hacker Industries, Inc.; Firm-Fill 2010 Floor Underlayment.
b. Maxxon Corporation; Gyp-Crete 2000.
c. USG Corporation; Levelrock 2500.
2. Cement Binder: Gypsum or blended gypsum cement as defined by ASTM C 219.
3. Compressive Strength: Not less than 2000 psi at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109.
4. Underlayment Additive: Resilient-emulsion product of underlayment manufacturer,
formulated for use with underlayment when applied to substrate and conditions indicated.
B. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch; or coarse sand as recommended by
underlayment manufacturer.
1. Provide aggregate when recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for
underlayment thickness required.
12043 035413 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 ISSUED 12/22/2014
C. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F.
D. Reinforcement: For underlayment applied to wood substrates, provide galvanized metal lath or
other corrosion-resistant reinforcement recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer.
E. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate,
conditions, and application indicated.
1. Primer shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Sound Mat:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Hacker Industries, Inc.; Sound Mat II.
b. Maxxon Corporation; Acoustimat II.
c. USG Corporation; Levelrock Brand Sound Reduction Mat.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions to
prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through underlayment.
2. Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking.
B. Wood Substrates: Mechanically fasten loose boards and panels to eliminate substrate
movement and squeaks. Sand to remove coatings that might impair underlayment bond and
remove sanding dust.
1. Install underlayment reinforcement recommended in writing by manufacturer.
C. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
12043 035413 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 ISSUED 12/22/2014
D. Sound Control Mat: Install sound control materials where indicated according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
1. Do not install mechanical fasteners that penetrate through the sound control materials.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after application
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
2. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment-to-substrate and
intercoat adhesion.
3. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to
continue through underlayment.
B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.
C. Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface.
1. Apply a final layer without aggregate to product surface.
2. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
D. Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination
during application and curing processes.
E. Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in writing
by underlayment manufacturer.
F. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including
areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction period.
END OF SECTION 03 54 13
12043 04 20 00 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN UNIT MASONRY
ISSUED: BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/14
SECTION 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Concrete masonry units.
2. Face brick.
3. Cast stone trim units.
4. Mortar and grout.
5. Steel reinforcing bars.
6. Masonry joint reinforcement.
7. Ties and anchors.
8. Embedded flashing.
9. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 04 Section "Cast Stone Masonry" for cast stone materials.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths at 28 days.
1. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry from average net-area
compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method)
according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For the following:
1. Stone Trim Units: Show sizes, profiles, and locations of each stone trim unit
required.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following:
1. Panel Review
12043 04 20 00 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN UNIT MASONRY
ISSUED: BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/14
a. Coordinate preparation of a 4’ x 4’ mockup panel for review of brick,
stone and mortar materials at location dictated by owner.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items
complies with requirements:
1. Masonry units.
a. Include data on material properties or material test reports substantiating
compliance with requirements.
b. For brick, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes
falls within specified tolerances.
c. For exposed brick, include test report for efflorescence according to
ASTM C 67.
2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer.
3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of
ingredients.
4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
5. Joint reinforcement.
6. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.
B. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and
proportions of ingredients.
1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property
specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength,
ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content.
2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to
comply with compressive strength requirement.
C. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit
type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of
masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry
determined according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by
requirements in the Contract Documents.
1. Comply with National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA) TEK
recommendations, as applicable, for installation of concrete unit masonry.
2. Comply With Brick Industry of America (BIA) Technical Notes of Brick
Construction recommendations, as applicable, for installation of brick unit
masonry.
3. Meet more stringent requirements of standards above where conditions common
to both occur.
12043 04 20 00 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN UNIT MASONRY
ISSUED: BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/14
B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture
and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from
single source from single manufacturer for each product required.
C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,
including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious
component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.
D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Locate mockups in the locations indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect.
2. Build mockups as indicated on drawings and in Division 1 sections.
a. Include all components and materials to reproduce a complete exterior
wall section.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store masonry units per manufacturer’s written instructions.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when
construction is not in progress.
1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls and hold cover
securely in place.
2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other
wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed
wythe and hold cover in place.
B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for
at least three days after building masonry walls or columns.
C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated
with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry
damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction
requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature
is 40 degree F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less
than seven days after completing cleaning.
D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements
contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
1. Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity conditions produce
excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade
and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required.
12043 04 20 00 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN UNIT MASONRY
ISSUED: BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/14
2. When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F, or 90 deg F with a wind velocity
greater than 8 mph, do not spread mortar beds more than 48 inches ahead of
masonry. Set masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL
A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of
units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard.
Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.
2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Concrete masonry units: ASTM C 90.
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area
compressive strength of 2150 psi unless otherwise indicated.
2. Density Classification: Normal weight.
3. Size: Indicated nominal width by nominal 16 inches long by nominal 8 inches
high.
a. Actual dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal, +/- 1/8 inch.
4. Where units are to be left exposed, provide color and texture matching the range
represented by Architect's sample.
2.3 CONCRETE AND MASONRY LINTELS
A. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam
CMUs with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast
lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured.
2.4 BRICK
A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching finish
and color of exposed faces of adjacent units:
1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise
expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with
exposed surfaces finished.
2. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot
accommodate special conditions, including those at corners, movement joints,
bond beams, sashes, and lintels.
3. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and
texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing.
4. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would
result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view.
B. Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C 216.
12043 04 20 00 - 5
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN UNIT MASONRY
ISSUED: BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/14
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a. Basis of Design: As indicated on drawings
2. Grade: SW.
3. Type: FBS.
4. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area
compressive strength of 3350 psi.
5. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per
ASTM C 67.
6. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and
is rated "not effloresced."
7. Size (Actual Dimensions): Unless noted otherwise, provide 3-1/2 inches wide by
2-1/4 inches high by 7-1/2 inches long.
8. Modular Brick Size (Nominal Dimensions): 4 inches wide by 2-2/3 inches high by
8 inches long.
2.5 CAST STONE TRIM UNITS
A. Refer to specification 04 72 00 for detailed information regarding cast stone materials to
be incorporated into masonry wall systems.
2.6 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Porland cement: ASTM C 150, type i or ii, except type iii may be used for cold-weather
construction. provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color
indicated
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime
containing no other ingredients.
1. Basis of Design: Amerimix, AMX 400 Series.
D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
F. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying
with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in
masonry mortar of composition indicated.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80.
b. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morseled.
c. Sonneborn Products, BASF Construction Chemicals; Trimix-NCA.
12043 04 20 00 - 6
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN UNIT MASONRY
ISSUED: BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/14
G. Water: Potable.
2.7 REINFORCEMENT
A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M,
Grade 60.
B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.
1. Interior Walls: Mill- galvanized, carbon steel.
2. Exterior Walls, Inside Wythe: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel.
3. Wire Size for Side Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter (9 gage).
4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter (9 gage).
5. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.148-inch diameter (9 gage).
6. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c.
7. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee
units.
C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Truss type with single pair of
side rods.
D. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Multiwythe Masonry: As indicated on Drawings or, if not
shown, Contractor’s option with one of the following:
1. Tab type, either ladder or truss design, with 1 side rod at each face shell of
backing wythe and with rectangular tabs sized to extend at least halfway through
facing wythe but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face.
2. Adjustable (two-piece) type, either ladder or truss design, with one side rod at
each face shell of backing wythe and with separate adjustable ties with pintle-
and-eye connections having a maximum adjustment of 1-1/4 inches. Size ties to
extend at least halfway through facing wythe but with at least 5/8-inch cover on
outside face. Ties have hooks or clips to engage a continuous horizontal wire in
the facing wythe.
2.8 TIES AND ANCHORS - MATERIALS
A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials
that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated.
1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with
ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating.
2. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel, G60 zinc
coating.
3. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial
Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.
4. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
12043 04 20 00 - 7
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN UNIT MASONRY
ISSUED: BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/14
2.9 TIES AND ANCHORS
A. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway
through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are
bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches parallel to face of veneer.
1. Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and
compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing
to wood or metal studs, and as follows:
a. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-
lbf load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing
play in excess of 0.05 inch.
2. Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from 0.105-
inch- (2.66-mm-) (12 gage) thick steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication.
3. Wire Ties: Triangular-, rectangular-, or T-shaped wire ties fabricated from
0.187-inch- diameter (7 gage), hot-dip galvanized-steel wire unless otherwise
indicated.
4. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie and a
metal anchor section.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following :
1) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; 315-D with 316.
2) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; DW-10HS.
3) Wire-Bond; 1004, Type III.
b. Anchor Section: Sheet metal plate, 1-1/4 inches wide by 6 inches long,
with screw holes top and bottom and with raised rib-stiffened strap, 5/8
inch wide by 3-5/8 inches long, stamped into center to provide a slot
between strap and plate for inserting wire tie.
2.10 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Flexible Flashing: Use the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable,
adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-
laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than
0.040 inch.
a. Accessories: Provide preformed corners, end dams, other special
shapes, and seaming materials produced by flashing manufacturer.
B. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard
products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing
sheets to each other and to substrates.
12043 04 20 00 - 8
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN UNIT MASONRY
ISSUED: BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/14
2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Metal Drip Edge: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (76 mm) into
wall and 1/2 inch (13 mm) out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and
hemmed.
B. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from
neoprene .
C. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound,
complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, complying with
ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain
lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.
D. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226,
Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).
E. Weep/Vent Products: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-
resistant polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth
1/8 inch less than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's
standard.
F. Cavity Drainage Material: Full depth of cavity, free-draining mesh, made from polymer
strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity.
G. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard predrilled aluminum bars,
approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors.
H. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning
masonry unit cells and hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from
0.148-inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for
number of bars indicated.
2.12 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,
retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
2. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be
exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is
consistent.
B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide
the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or
needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry.
1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M.
2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S.
12043 04 20 00 - 9
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN UNIT MASONRY
ISSUED: BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/14
3. For mortar parge coats, use Type N.
4. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet
walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and
for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.
C. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.
1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse)
that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions
of grout spaces and pour height.
2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, paragraph 4.2.2 for specified
28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi.
3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full
thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units
of widths indicated.
B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.
C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing
equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to
opening.
D. Where possible, use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to
provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven
saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless
wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut
edges concealed.
E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors
and textures.
1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.
F. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq.
in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are
damp but not wet at time of laying.
1. Do not wet concrete masonry units.
3.2 TOLERANCES
A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
12043 04 20 00 - 10
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN UNIT MASONRY
ISSUED: BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/14
3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and
offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where
possible, at other locations.
B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in
pattern indicated below; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face
dimensions at corners or jambs.
1. Exposed Brick Masonry Assemblies: running bond
2. Exposed Concrete Masonry Unit Assemblies: running bond
C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not
less than 4-inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not
use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from
those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that
are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required
before laying fresh masonry.
E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other
Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise
indicated.
G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer
of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into
core.
H. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels,
posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.
3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow brick and CMUs as follows:
1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed
joints.
2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.
3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course
on footings.
4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting
course on footings where cells are not grouted.
5. At cavity walls, bevel beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into
cavity. As work progresses, trowel mortar fins protruding into cavity flat against
the cavity face of the brick.
B. Set stone cast-stone trim units in full bed of mortar with full vertical joints. Fill dowel,
anchor, and similar holes.
12043 04 20 00 - 11
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN UNIT MASONRY
ISSUED: BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/14
1. Clean soiled surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with
clear water.
2. Allow cleaned surfaces to dry before setting.
3. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar.
C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than
joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 CAVITY WALLS
A. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using one of the following methods:
1. Individual Metal Ties: Provide ties as shown installed in horizontal joints, but not
less than one metal tie for 2.67 sq. ft. of wall area spaced not to exceed 24
inches o.c. horizontally and 16 inches o.c. vertically. Stagger ties in alternate
courses. Provide additional ties within 12 inches of openings and space not
more than 36 inches apart around perimeter of openings. At intersecting and
abutting walls, provide ties at no more than 24 inches o.c. vertically.
a. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable (two-piece) type
ties.
b. Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry,
use adjustable (two-piece) type ties to allow for differential movement
regardless of whether bed joints align.
2. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints.
a. Where bed joints of both wythes align, use tab-type reinforcement.
b. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable (two-piece) type
reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to
ties.
c. Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry,
use adjustable (two-piece) type reinforcement with continuous horizontal
wire in facing wythe attached to ties to allow for differential movement
regardless of whether bed joints align.
3. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each wythe and course at
corners, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Header Bonding: Provide masonry unit headers extending not less than 3 inches
into each wythe. Space headers not over 8 inches clear horizontally and 16
inches clear vertically.
5. Masonry Veneer Anchors: Comply with requirements for anchoring masonry
veneers.
B. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at
juncture, bond walls together as follows:
1. Provide individual metal ties not more than 16 inches o.c.
2. Provide continuity with masonry joint reinforcement by using prefabricated "T"
units.
3. Provide rigid metal anchors not more than 24 inches o.c. If used with hollow
masonry units, embed ends in mortar-filled cores.
12043 04 20 00 - 12
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN UNIT MASONRY
ISSUED: BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/14
C. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel
beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to
trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into cavity.
3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of
5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6
inches.
1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c.
2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet
walls.
3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings
and extending 12 inches beyond openings.
B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.
D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners,
returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.
3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS
A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing and masonry backup with masonry-veneer
anchors to comply with the following requirements:
1. Fasten screw-attached anchors through sheathing to wall framing and to
masonry backup with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners
unless anchor design only uses one fastener.
2. Embed tie sections in masonry joints. Provide not less than 2 inches of air space
between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing.
3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties
up and down.
4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 18 inches o.c. vertically and 24
inches o.c. horizontally, with not less than 1 anchor for each 2 sq. ft. of wall area.
Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not
exceeding 8 inches, around perimeter.
3.8 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry
progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision
to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.
B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows :
12043 04 20 00 - 13
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN UNIT MASONRY
ISSUED: BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/14
1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of CMUs on one side of
control joint. Fill resultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for
application of sealant.
2. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.
3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at
joint. Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake out joint for application of
sealant.
C. Form expansion joints in brick as follows:
1. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than
3/8 inch for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Division 07 Section
"Joint Sealants."
3.9 LINTELS
A. Refer to Division 05 Section “Metal Fabrications” for steel lintel requirements.
B. Install steel lintels where indicated.
C. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches for
brick-size units and 24 inches for block-size units are shown without structural steel or
other supporting lintels.
D. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.
3.10 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS
A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels,
ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install
vents at shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and
where indicated.
B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:
1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that
could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall
flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with
mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as
recommended by flashing manufacturer.
2. At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing through outer
wythe, turned up a minimum of 8 inches, and through inner wythe to within 1/2
inch of the interior face of wall in exposed masonry. Where interior face of wall is
to receive furring or framing, carry flashing completely through inner wythe and
turn flashing up approximately 2 inches on interior face.
3. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across air space
behind veneer, and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches; with upper edge
tucked under building paper or building wrap, lapping at least 4 inches.
4. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry
at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not
less than 2 inches to form end dams.
12043 04 20 00 - 14
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN UNIT MASONRY
ISSUED: BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/14
5. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop
flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible
flashing to top of metal drip edge.
C. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately
above embedded flashing and as follows:
1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes.
2. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c. at continuous runs of exterior walls with a
minimum of two per column wrap between window openings unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for
cavity drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.
E. Install vents in head joints in exterior wythes at 48 inches spacing indicated. Use
specified vinyl weep/vent products to form vents.
1. Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated.
Install through-wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking.
3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and
inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas,
as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply
with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.
B. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided,
according to ASTM C 780.
C. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780.
Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength.
D. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.
3.12 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise
damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units;
install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and
completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent
construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant
application, where indicated.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to
remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as
follows:
12043 04 20 00 - 15
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN UNIT MASONRY
ISSUED: BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/14
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic
scrape hoes or chisels.
2. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by
covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and
waterproof masking tape.
3. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly
by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
4. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA
Technical Notes 20.
5. Clean stone trim to comply with stone supplier's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 04 20 00
12043 04 20 00 - 16
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN UNIT MASONRY
ISSUED: BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/14
This page intentionally left blank.
12043 04 72 00 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CAST STONE MASONRY
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
SECTION 04 72 00 - CAST STONE MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Cast stone trim including the following:
a. Window sills.
b. Lintels.
c. Coping.
d. Wall caps.
e. Belt courses.
f. Water tables.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1. For cast stone units, include construction details, material descriptions,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for cast stone units. Include
dimensions, details of reinforcement and anchorages if any, and indication of finished
faces.
1. Include building elevations showing layout of units and locations of joints and
anchors.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For colored mortar.
D. Samples for Verification:
1. For each color and texture of cast stone required, 10 inches square in size.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and testing agency.
1. Include copies of material test reports for completed projects, indicating
compliance of cast stone with ASTM C 1364.
12043 04 72 00 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CAST STONE MASONRY
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
B. Material Test Reports: For each mix required to produce cast stone, based on testing
according to ASTM C 1364, including test for resistance to freezing and thawing.
1. Provide test reports based on testing within previous two years.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer of cast stone units similar to those
indicated for this Project that has sufficient production capacity to manufacture required
units, and is a plant certified by the Cast Stone Institute or the Architectural Precast
Association.
B. Source Limitations for Cast Stone: Obtain cast stone units through single source from
single manufacturer.
C. Mockups: Furnish cast stone for installation in mockups specified in Section 04 20 00
"Unit Masonry."
1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Coordinate delivery of cast stone with unit masonry work to avoid delaying the Work.
B. Pack, handle, and ship cast stone units in suitable packs or pallets.
1. Lift with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining.
Move cast stone units, if required, using dollies with wood supports.
2. Store cast stone units on wood skids or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof
covers, securely tied. Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage
to units. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation.
C. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.
D. Store mortar aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be main-
tained and contamination can be avoided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CAST STONE MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1364 and the following:
B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, containing not more than 0.60 percent
total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. Provide natural color or white cement
as required to produce cast stone color indicated.
C. Coarse Aggregates: Granite, quartz, or limestone complying with ASTM C 33; gradation
and colors as needed to produce required cast stone textures and colors.
12043 04 72 00 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CAST STONE MASONRY
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
D. Fine Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone complying with ASTM C 33, gradation
and colors as needed to produce required cast stone textures and colors.
E. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-
reducing admixtures; color stable, free of carbon black, nonfading, and resistant to lime
and other alkalis.
F. Admixtures: Use only admixtures specified or approved in writing by Architect.
1. Do not use admixtures that contain more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride
ions by mass of cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing
calcium chloride.
2. Use only admixtures that are certified by manufacturer to be compatible with
cement and other admixtures used.
3. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. Add to mixes for units exposed to the
exterior at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in an air content of 4 to 6
percent, except do not add to zero-slump concrete mixes.
4. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
5. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
6. Water-Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type E.
G. Reinforcement: Deformed steel bars complying with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60.
Use galvanized or epoxy-coated reinforcement when covered with less than 1-1/2 inches
of cast stone material.
1. Epoxy Coating: ASTM A 775/A 775M.
2. Galvanized Coating: ASTM A 767/A 767M.
H. Embedded Anchors and Other Inserts: Fabricated from stainless steel complying with
ASTM A 240/A 240M, ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666, Type 304.
2.2 CAST STONE UNITS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following :
1. Alliance Materials, Inc.
2. Continental Cast Stone Manufacturing, Inc.
3. Custom Cast Stone.
4. Dallas Cast Stone Co., Inc.
5. Edwards Precast Concrete Co.
6. K & T Stoneworks
7. Russell: W. N. Russell & Co.
8. Stonco Inc.
9. Sun Precast Co., Inc.
B. Reinforce units as indicated and as required by ASTM C 1364. Use galvanized or epoxy-
coated reinforcement when covered with less than 1-1/2 inches of material.
1. Welded wire fabric reinforcing shall not be used in dry cast products.
C. Provide cast stone units complying with ASTM C 1364 using either the vibrant dry tamp
or wet-cast method.
12043 04 72 00 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CAST STONE MASONRY
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
1. Provide units that are resistant to freezing and thawing as determined by
laboratory testing according to ASTM C 666/C 666M, Procedure A, as modified
by ASTM C 1364.
D. Fabricate units with sharp arris and accurately reproduced details, with indicated texture
on all exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
1. Slope exposed horizontal surfaces 1:12 to drain unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide raised fillets at backs of sills and at ends indicated to be built into jambs.
3. Provide drips on projecting elements unless otherwise indicated.
E. Fabrication Tolerances:
1. Variation in Cross Section: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than
1/8 inch.
2. Variation in Length: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/360
of the length of unit or 1/8 inch, whichever is greater, but in no case by more than
1/4 inch.
3. Warp, Bow, and Twist: Not to exceed 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch,
whichever is greater.
4. Location of Grooves, False Joints, Holes, Anchorages, and Similar Features: Do
not vary from indicated position by more than 1/8 inch on formed surfaces of
units and 3/8 inch on unformed surfaces.
F. Cure units as follows:
1. Cure units in enclosed moist curing room at 95 to 100 percent relative humidity
and temperature of 100 degree F for 12 hours or 70 degree F for 16 hours.
2. Additional yard curing at 95 percent relative humidity shall be 350 degree-days
(i.e. 7 days at 50°F (10°C) or 5 days at 70°F (21°C)) prior to shipping. Form
cured units shall be protected from moisture evaporation with curing blankets or
curing compounds after casting.
G. Acid etch units after curing to remove cement film from surfaces to be exposed to view.
H. Color and Texture: Provide units with fine-grained texture and buff color resembling
Indiana limestone.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Anchors: Type and size indicated, fabricated from Type 304 stainless steel complying
with ASTM A 240/A 240M, ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666.
B. Dowels: 1/2-inch- diameter, round bars, fabricated from Type 304 stainless steel
complying with ASTM A 240/A 240M, ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666.
2.4 MORTAR MIXES
A. Comply with requirements in Section 04 20 00 "Unit Masonry" for mortar mixes.
1. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated.
B. Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification.
12043 04 72 00 - 5
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CAST STONE MASONRY
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
1. For setting mortar, use Type N.
2. For pointing mortar, use Type N.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 SETTING CAST STONE IN MORTAR
A. Install cast stone units to comply with requirements in Division 04 Section 04 20 00, "Unit
Masonry."
B. Set cast stone as indicated on Drawings. Set units accurately in locations indicated with
edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances.
1. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or
necessary to secure units in place.
2. Coordinate installation of cast stone with installation of flashing specified in other
Sections.
C. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar or setting in mortar.
D. Set units in full bed of mortar with full head joints unless otherwise indicated.
1. Set units with joints 1/4 to 3/8 inch wide unless otherwise indicated.
2. Build anchors and ties into mortar joints as units are set.
3. Fill dowel holes and anchor slots with mortar.
4. Fill collar joints solid as units are set.
5. Build concealed flashing into mortar joints as units are set.
6. Keep head joints in coping and other units with exposed horizontal surfaces open
to receive sealant.
7. Keep joints at shelf angles open to receive sealant.
E. Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depths of not less than 3/4 inch. Rake joints to
uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides. Scrub faces of units to remove ex-
cess mortar as joints are raked.
F. Point mortar joints by placing and compacting mortar in layers not greater than 3/8 inch.
Compact each layer thoroughly and allow it to become thumbprint hard before applying
next layer.
G. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than
joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.
H. Provide sealant joints at copings and other horizontal surfaces, at expansion, control, and
pressure-relieving joints, and at locations indicated.
12043 04 72 00 - 6
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CAST STONE MASONRY
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
1. Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials.
2. Build in compressible foam-plastic joint fillers where indicated.
3. Form joint of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch .
4. Prime cast stone surfaces to receive sealant and install compressible backer rod
in joints before applying sealant unless otherwise indicated.
5. Prepare and apply sealant of type and at locations indicated to comply with
applicable requirements in Division 07 Section 07 90 20 "Joint Sealants."
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace stained and otherwise damaged units and units not matching
approved Samples. Cast stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by
Architect.
B. Replace units in a manner that results in cast stone matching approved Samples,
complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.
END OF SECTION 04 72 00
12043 051200 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 ISSUED 12/22/2014
SECTION 05 12 00 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Extent of structural steel work is indicated on the Drawings, including framing plans, schedules,
notes, and details to show the size and location of members, typical connections, and type of
steel required.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for independent testing agency procedures and
administrative requirements.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings to include all information necessary for fabrication and
erection as follows:
1. Details of proposed connections for each member size, steel grade, connection type and
design reaction indicated on the drawings. Use standard details where appropriate.
Refer to Part 2 – Products “Design” for criteria.
2. Structural calculations prepared and sealed by a qualified engineer licensed in the State
of Indiana for each connection condition indicated above. Submit sample calculations for
typical connections for review before preparation of Detail Drawings.
3. Base plate and anchor rod plans showing the location, size and identification marks of all
base plate, bolts, grades of steel and setting elevations.
4. Erection Plans (minimum 1/8”=1’-0” scale) showing type, size, weight and identification
marks of all structural steel members. Include temporary members required for erection,
dimensions locating all members relative to column grid lines, elevations of all members,
and clear cross references with all other related drawings. Also, include the necessary
information and instructions regarding field welds and field bolts including type, size and
extent of field welds, types of electrodes, joint welding procedures, welding sequence and
size and type of field bolts.
5. Detail Drawings showing complete details for the fabrication of all structural steel
members and components including, but not limited to: identification marks, dimensions,
size, type, weight and grade of steel; requirements for installation of other materials or
parts of construction, such as punched or drilled holes, cleats, openings, etc.; type, size
and extent of shop and field welds; type of electrodes, joint welding procedures, welding
sequences, size and type of shop and field bolts; cleaning requirements prior to painting;
type and dry thickness of paint. Use welding symbols used by the American Welding
Society.
6. Drawings and calculations of all shop and field modifications and/or remedial work.
7. Drawing index sheets, including updated sheets, at the same time that details are
submitted.
8. Contract Document plan drawings may be reproduced by the Contractor with the
following provisions:
a. Plan drawings may be reproduced only to locate piece marks. The responsibility
for producing complete and accurate shop drawings remains with the Contractor.
12043 051200 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 ISSUED 12/22/2014
b. The Contractor must remove all title blocks, notes, references, revision marks, and
section marks referring to the Contract Document plan drawings.
c. Only the plans, modified as described above, may be reproduced. Contract
Document detail drawings may not be reproduced, in whole or in part, for any
reason.
B. Substitutions: Substitutions for the members sizes, type(s) of steel, connection details, or any
other modifications proposed by the Contractor will be considered by the Architect/Engineer
under the following conditions:
1. The revisions in no case result in additional cost to the Owner. In considering cost
savings to the Owner, adequate compensation for the Engineer’s review of these
substitutions should be considered.
2. The request is made in writing and accepted prior to the submission of shop drawings.
3. It is suitably demonstrated that there is a substantial cost or time advantage to the
Owner.
4. Sufficient sketches, engineering calculations by a Structural Engineer licensed in the
State of Indiana, and other data submitted to facilitate the review by the
Architect/Engineer.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data; For qualified Fabricator, Erector [Detailer] [Connection Engineer]:
B. Welding certificates.
C. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions for
each proprietary product, including laboratory test reports and such other data as may be
required to show compliance with the specifications. Indicate by transmittal form that copies of
such data have been distributed to the Fabricator/Installer and the Owner’s Testing Laboratory.
1. Certified copies of mill reports covering the chemical and physical properties of the steel.
2. High strength bolts, each type, including nuts and washers.
3. Unfinished bolts and nuts.
4. Welding electrodes, each type.
5. Shop coat primer paint(s).
6. Grout.
D. Record Surveys: Submit three (3) copies of certified survey(s) by the Contractor’s licensed
professional surveyor as specified in Part 3-Execution for both the base conditions prior to
erection and the final erected steel frame.
E. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs):
Provide according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for each welded joint
whether prequalified or qualified by testing, including the following:
1. Power source (constant current or constant voltage).
2. Electrode manufacturer and trade name, for demand critical welds.
F. Source quality-control reports.
G. Calculation submittal letter: with the shop and erection drawings, provide final substantiating
connection information in the form of calculations and a letter stating that the shop and erection
drawings properly incorporate the connection designs signed and sealed by the licensed
12043 051200 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 ISSUED 12/22/2014
connection engineer in responsible charge of the connection design. Provide a means by which
the substantiating connection information is referenced to the related connections on the shop
and erection drawings for the purpose of review.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Fabricator shall have 10 years of comparable experience in installations of this type and
shall employ labor and supervisory personnel familiar with the type of installation, experienced
in fabrication and erection of structural steel for projects of similar size and complexity. At the
time of bid the Fabricator shall be AISC certified to the Standard for Steel Building Structures
(STD) and must submit proof of these qualifications. The Fabricator’s qualifications shall be
subject to review by the Architect/Engineer.
A. The Erector shall have 10 years of successful experience erecting structural steel for structures
of this type and complexity in the region of this project. The Erector’s qualifications shall be
subject to review by the Architect/Engineer.
B. The Detailer shall have 10 years experience preparing detailed shop drawings and CNC
downloads for structures of this type and complexity. The Detailer’s qualifications shall be
subject to review by the Architect/Engineer.
C. The Contractor’s Connection Engineer(s) shall be qualified to perform the type of work required
by the project. The Engineer(s) shall be a professional engineer licensed in the State of Indiana
and shall have 10 years experience being in responsible charge of work of this nature. The
proposed Engineer(s) qualifications shall be subject to review by the Architect/Engineer.
D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural
Welding Code - Steel."
E. Pre-Construction Conference:
1. Conduct a meeting prior to the preparation of Shop Drawings to review the detailed
requirements for preparing calculations and shop drawings, sequence of submittals,
erection tolerances, welding qualifications, inspection procedures, surveys, and other
similar matters.
2. Responsible representatives from all concerned parties are required to attend the
meeting including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Contractor’s Superintendent.
b. Architect/Engineer.
c. Structural Steel Fabricator.
d. Structural Steel Detailer.
e. Structural Steel Contractor’s Connection Engineer.
f. Structural Steel Erector.
g. Owner’s Testing Laboratory.
h. Surveyor.
3. Record and distribute legible meeting minutes within 10 business days to all parties in
attendance at the meeting and an additional copy to the Owner’s representative.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off
ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel
members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.
12043 051200 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 ISSUED 12/22/2014
1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or
overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or
structures as directed.
B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.
1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes
repackaging and seals containers.
2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use.
3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating
ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint
and coating manufacturers' recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are
compatible with one another.
B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction
without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and
directions for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS
A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992.
B. Channels, and Angles: ASTM A 36.
C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36.
D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B [C], structural tubing.
E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.
2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS
A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts;
ASTM A 563, Grade C, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened
carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.
B. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural
bolts or tension-control, bolt-nut-washer assemblies with splined ends; ASTM A 563, Grade DH,
heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers with
plain finish.
1. Do not use A325 and A490 bolts of the same diameter. Different grade bolts must vary in
diameter by a minimum of ¼ inch.
12043 051200 - 5
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 ISSUED 12/22/2014
C. Zinc-Coated High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel
structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade DH heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 ,
Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers.
1. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating. Bolts and nuts to be shipped as assembly from the same
supplier.
D. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy-
hex, or round head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy-hex
carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers.
1. Finish: Plain.
E. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished
carbon steel; AWS D1.1, Type B.
F. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.
1. Configuration: Straight.
2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel.
3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36 carbon steel.
4. Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel.
5. Finish: Plain.
G. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36.
1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 hex carbon steel.
2. Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel.
3. Finish: Plain.
2.3 PRIMER
A. Shop Primer-(Steel not exposed to the elements: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-
free, non-asphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat .
B. Shop Primer-(Steel exposed to the elements: Series 90-97 Zinc Rich Urethane Primer by
Tnemec Company.
C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc
dust by weight.
1. Galvilite by ZRC Worldwide.
2. Approved equal.
2.4 GROUT
A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic
aggregate grout, noncorrosive and non-staining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for
application and a 30-minute working time.
12043 051200 - 6
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 ISSUED 12/22/2014
2.5 DESIGN
A. Connections:
1. Design and detail all connections to resist the loads and reactions indicated on the
Drawings or specified herein. Use details consistent with the details shown on the
Drawings, supplementing where necessary. The details shown on the Drawings are
conceptual, show only the minimum requirements to convey design intent, and do not
indicate the required weld sizes or numbers of bolts unless specifically noted. Use
rational engineering design and standard detailing practice in detailing, accounting for all
loads and eccentricities in both the connection and the members. Promptly notify the
Architect/Engineer of any location where the connection design criteria is not clearly
indicated. The design of all connections is subject to the review and acceptance of the
Architect/Engineer.
2. A combination of bolts and welds to transmit loads in the same faying surface is not
permitted.
3. Use ASD; data are given at service-load level.
4. Use beam-to-column connections which minimize the eccentric loading on the column.
Detail and fabricate unrestrained simple beam end connections to minimize end restraint
of the beam. Design all parts of such connections (such as welds, bolts, and material)
taking eccentricity into account.
5. The contractor shall design and provide any stiffeners plates, doubler plates, reinforcing
plates, etc. and their connections that may be required to develop and/or transfer the
forces and/or connection design criteria called for in the contract documents.
6. Design connections to withstand the combined effects of shear, axial forces, moments
and torques and as required by applicable code(s) and the contract documents.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate
according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC 360.
1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated.
2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up.
3. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.
4. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-
priming operations.
B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.
1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1.
C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to
metal surfaces.
D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.
E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-
SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning, SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning or SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool
Cleaning." Remove all materials that might impair proper adhesion of spray fireproofing.
F. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear
connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to
AWS D1.1and manufacturer's written instructions.
12043 051200 - 7
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 ISSUED 12/22/2014
G. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to
pass through steel framing members.
1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes
or enlarge holes by burning.
2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to
steel surfaces.
3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.
2.7 SHOP CONNECTIONS
A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.
1. Joint Type: Snug tightened unless indicated as Pretensioned or Slip critical.
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure
specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.
1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes
without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material.
2.8 SHOP PRIMING
A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:
1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded
members to a depth of 2 inches.
2. Surfaces to be field welded, including the top surface of beams to receive steel deck
and/or shear connectors fastened by welding.
3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections.
4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing).
5. Galvanized surfaces.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and
spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and
standards:
1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning" or SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning” for structural
steel not exposed to the elements.
2. SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning" for structural steel exposed to the
elements.
C. Priming of steel not exposed to the environment: Immediately after surface preparation, apply
primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to
provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. Use priming methods that result in full
coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or
erection.
3. If, for any reason, any surface to field welded is painted, remove the paint completely to
within the stated limits before welding. If high strength, slip-critical bolted connection
12043 051200 - 8
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 ISSUED 12/22/2014
contact surfaces are painted, the allowable load per bolt used in design must be in
accordance with RCSC “Specification” value for the paint used.
A. Priming of steel exposed to the environment: Immediately after surface preparation, apply
primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to
provide a minimum dry film thickness of 3.0 to 4.0 mils. Use priming methods that result in full
coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. Steel will receive a finish top coat(s)
per Division 9.
2.9 GALVANIZING
A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel
according to ASTM A 123.
1. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work unless they will function
as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and
locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with
requirements.
1. Prepare a certified survey of bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other
embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural
steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in
intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel,
connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-in-
place concrete has attained its design compressive strength.
3.3 ERECTION
A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to
AISC 303 and AISC 360.
B. Base Plates: Clean concrete surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior
to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.
1. Set plates for structural members on setting nuts.
2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate.
12043 051200 - 9
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 ISSUED 12/22/2014
3. Pretension anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.
4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain.
Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with
manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.
C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for
Steel Buildings and Bridges."
D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before
permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be
in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for
discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.
2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean
temperature when structure is completed and in service.
E. Splice members only where indicated.
F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Architect. Finish thermally cut
sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1.
G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be
enlarged to admit bolts.
H. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear
connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to
AWS D1.1and manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS
A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural
Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.
1. Joint Type: Snug tightened unless indicated as Pretensioned or Slip critical .
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure
specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.
1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary
connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs where indicated, back gouge, and grind steel
smooth.
3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes
without exceeding tolerances in AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings
and Bridges" for mill material.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections.
12043 051200 - 10
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 ISSUED 12/22/2014
B. Bolted Connections: Bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1.
1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested and inspected according to
AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:
a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on
finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be
accepted.
c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors according to
requirements in AWS D1.1for stud welding and as follows:
1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree
flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.
2. Conduct tests on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors
already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1.
E. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the
Contract Documents.
3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged
or missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-
PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool
cleaning.
END OF SECTION 05 12 00
12043 053100 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN STEEL DECKING
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 ISSUED 12/22/2014
SECTION 05 31 00 - STEEL DECKING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Noncomposite form deck.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 3 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete” for concrete fill and reinforcing steel.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans,
cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
B. Product certificates.
C. Evaluation reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural
Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and
handling.
B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a
waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.
12043 053100 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN STEEL DECKING
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 ISSUED 12/22/2014
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Canam United States; Canam Group Inc.
2. Consolidated Systems, Inc.; Metal Dek Group.
3. Epic Metals Corporation.
4. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC.
5. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Group.
6. Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation.
2.2 NON-COMPOSITE FORM DECK
A. Non-composite Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, with integrally embossed or raised pattern ribs
and interlocking side laps, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Composite
Steel Floor Deck," in SDI Publication No, and with the following:
1. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 40, G60 zinc
coating.
2. Profile Depth: As indicated.
3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated.
4. Span Condition: As indicated.
Side Laps: Overlapped.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with
requirements indicated.
B. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel
screws, No. 10 minimum diameter.
C. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000
psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck;
of profile indicated or required for application.
D. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, of same
material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile indicated.
E. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material,
finish, and thickness as deck, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Weld Washers: Utilize weld washers for all deck less than 0.0295 inch in thickness.
G. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.
12043 053100 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN STEEL DECKING
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 ISSUED 12/22/2014
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in
SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.
B. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned
and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract
side-lap interlocks.
C. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.
D. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting
through or adjacent to deck.
E. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength,
continuity of deck, and support of other work.
F. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.
G. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel-sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting
structure according to SDI recommendations unless otherwise indicated.
H. Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel-sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck,
according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and
sides of deck.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Field welds will be subject to inspection.
C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.
E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of
corrected work with specified requirements.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of
deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
END OF SECTION 05 31 00
12102M 05 40 00 - 1
THE OLIVIA COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
SECTION 05 40 00 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Load-bearing framing in non-load bearing exterior wall framing systems related to
the cantilever support of specified opening systems.
2. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed steel framing product and accessory.
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed
by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel
framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical
fasteners.
2. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping,
bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to
adjoining work.
3. For cold-formed metal framing indicated to comply with design loads, include
structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
4. Engineer structural gravity and lateral reactions from openings through structural
studs and resolve to primary structure.
A. UL Assemblies: Provide assembly numbers designations from UL's "Fire Resistance
Directory." or GA-600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual" and associated information for
each wall type where cold formed metal framing is used in a rated assembly.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
12102M 05 40 00 - 2
THE OLIVIA COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other
information specified.
C. Welding certificates for field welds.
D. Mill certificates signed by steel sheet producer indicating steel sheet complies with
requirements.
E. Product Test Reports: For each listed product, for tests performed by manufacturer and
witnessed by a qualified testing agency or a qualified testing agency.
1. Steel sheet.
2. Expansion anchors.
3. Power-actuated anchors.
4. Mechanical fasteners.
5. Vertical deflection clips.
6. Horizontal drift deflection clips
7. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.
F. Evaluation Reports: For non-standard cold-formed steel framing, from ICC-ES.
Connection products shall have a valid ICC-ES report or equivalent complying with ICC
Acceptance Criteria AC 261.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed cold-formed metal
framing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose
work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a qualified professional engineer to prepare design
calculations, Shop Drawings, and other structural data.
D. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified and
licensed to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in
providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as
those performed for installations that are similar to those indicated for this Project in
material, design, and extent.
E. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency, or
in-house testing with calibrated test equipment indicating steel sheet complies with
requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total
elongation, chemical requirements, and metallic-coating thickness.
F. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
12102M 05 40 00 - 3
THE OLIVIA COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect cold-formed steel framing from corrosion, moisture staining, deformation, and
other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following :
1. AllSteel & Gypsum Products, Inc.
2. California Expanded Metal Products Company.
3. Clark Dietrick Building Systems, Inc.
4. Consolidated Fabricators Corp.; Building Products Division.
5. Craco Mfg., Inc.
6. Custom Stud Inc.
7. MarinoWARE.
8. Nuconsteel; a Nucor Company.
9. SCAFCO Corporation.
10. Southeastern Stud & Components, Inc.
11. State Building Products, Inc.
12. Steel Construction Systems.
13. Steel Network, Inc. (The).
14. Steel Structural Systems.
15. Super Stud Building Products, Inc.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design cold formed metal framing system, including comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, licensed in the state the project
is located, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Coordination with Drawings:
1. Framing member depths indicated on Drawings are minimum allowed member
depths.
2. Framing member spacing indicated on Drawings are maximum allowed on-center
spacing.
3. Member thicknesses (gages) indicated on Drawings are minimum allowed
member thicknesses.
4. The use of kickers to reduce the effective vertical span of any member are
allowed provided that the kickers are completely concealed above finished
ceilings and are not in conflict with any mechanical, electrical, plumbing, fire
protection, or building structural system.
C. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed steel framing capable of withstanding
design loads within limits and under conditions indicated.
1. Design Loads: As indicated on Structural Drawings.
12102M 05 40 00 - 4
THE OLIVIA COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
a. Opening Loads: As indicated on approved opening systems shop
drawings and structural connection calculations.
2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without
deflections greater than the following:
a. Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Framing for Masonry Back-up: Horizontal
deflection of 1/600 of the wall height.
b. Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Framing for EIFS Back-up: Horizontal
deflection of 1/360 of the wall height
c. Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of
the wall height.
d. Ceiling Joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span.
3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members located
outside the insulated building envelope without damage or overstressing,
sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or
other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature
change of 120 degree F.
4. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for
construction tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary
building structure as follows:
a. Upward and downward movement of 1/2 inch.
5. Design framing system supporting openings to carry the full dead and live loads.
Resolve all loads back to the primary structure.
6. Design exterior non-load-bearing wall framing to accommodate horizontal
deflection without regard for contribution of sheathing materials.
D. Cold-Formed Steel Framing Design Standards:
1. Floor and Roof Systems: AISI S210.
2. Wall Studs: AISI S211.
3. Headers: AISI S212.
4. Lateral Design: AISI S213.
E. AISI Specifications and Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated,
comply with AISI S100 and AISI S200.
F. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
2.3 COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of
grade and coating weight as follows:
1. Grade: ST33H or ST50H as required by structural performance.
2. Coating: G90 or equivalent.
B. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc
coated, of grade and coating as follows:
12102M 05 40 00 - 5
THE OLIVIA COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
1. Grade: 33 .
2. Coating: G90.
2.4 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING
A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated,
punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inchminimum (16 gage).
2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches minimum.
B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated on
Drawings, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows:
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch minimum. (16 gage).
2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches .
C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass and head clips, capable of
accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure and
horizontal adjustment capable of accommodating construction tolerances of supporting
structural system, through positive mechanical attachment to stud web.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following :
a. AllSteel & Gypsum Products, Inc.
b. ClarkWestern Building Systems, Inc.
c. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries company.
d. MarinoWARE.
e. SCAFCO Corporation.
f. Steel Network, Inc. (The).
g. Steeler, Inc.
2. Proprietary clip systems of listed manufacturers complying with structural and
performance requirements are acceptable.
D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; un-
punched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free
vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to
the primary structure, and as follows:
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch (16 gage).
2. Flange Width: 3 inches minimum.
3. Tracks relying steel flexure to perform are unacceptable.
E. Opening Support Track:
1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As determined by engineering calculation to
support gravity and lateral loads but in no case shall be less than 0.0538 inch
(1.37 mm) (16 gage).
2. Flange Width: 3 inch minimum.
3. Corner Clips: Provide corner clips at all opening track corners of equal thickness
to track.
12102M 05 40 00 - 6
THE OLIVIA COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
4. Track reinforcements, structural angles, gage metal angles, web stiffeners, clips,
studs and braces: As determined by structural stud system engineer.
2.5 FRAMING ACCESSORIES
A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural
Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing
members with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi and as indicated on Shop
Drawings.
2.6 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS
A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to
ASTM A 123/A 123M.
B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 minimum, threaded carbon-steel headless,
hooked bolts and carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-
dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.
C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load or
strength design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater
than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by
a qualified testing agency.
D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated,
fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated
according to ICC-ES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by
testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency.
E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-
tapping, steel drill screws.
1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard else-
where.
F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.
B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand,
ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum
water required for placement and hydration.
C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout
containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and
plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, with fluid
consistency and 30-minute working time.
12102M 05 40 00 - 7
THE OLIVIA COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
D. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, and nonleaching; or of cold-
formed steel of same grade and coating as framing members supported by shims.
E. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's
standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.
2.8 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and
with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and
standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.
1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates.
2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
3. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch
fastening, pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire
tying of framing members is not permitted.
a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting
welding work.
b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings,
with screw penetrating joined members by no fewer than three exposed
screw threads.
4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed steel framing by welding, bolting,
pneumatic pin fastening, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.
B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and
erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.
C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a
maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:
1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch
from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening
requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.
2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel framing assembly to a maximum
out-of-square tolerance of 1/8 inch.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the
Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
12102M 05 40 00 - 8
THE OLIVIA COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Install sealer gaskets at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and at the top of
foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations at exterior walls of non-load bearing walls.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be
field assembled.
B. Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200 and to manufacturer's written
instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting
structure.
1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce
flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position
between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch.
D. Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and
with connections securely fastened.
1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
2. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch
fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.
a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting
welding work.
b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings,
and complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw
penetration.
E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for
track or tension members.
F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable
in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in
place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and
permanent connections to framing are secured.
G. Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold-formed steel framing. Independently
frame both sides of joints.
H. Install insulation, specified in Division 07 Section 07 21 00, "Thermal Insulation," in built-
up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at
openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.
I. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's
approved or standard punched openings.
J. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a
maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:
12102M 05 40 00 - 9
THE OLIVIA COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan
location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of
sheathing or other finishing materials.
3.4 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION
A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely an-
chor to supporting structure as indicated.
B. Fasten both flanges of studs to bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as
follows:
C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or
warped surfaces and similar requirements.
D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of verti-
cal loads while providing lateral support.
1. Install single deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure.
2. Install double deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building struc-
ture.
3. Mechanically fasten vertical deflection clips to studs and anchor to building struc-
ture.
4. Connect drift clips to cold-formed metal framing and anchor to building structure.
E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows indicated on Shop
Drawings . Fasten at each stud intersection.
1. Top Bridging for Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12
inches of single deflection track. Install a combination of bridging and stud or
stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs, secured to stud
webs or flanges.
F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip
angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable
wall-framing system.
3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated
and installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to
ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer
and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 05 40 00
12102M 05 50 00 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN METAL FABRICATIONS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Steel framing and supports for overhead doors
2. Loose steel lintels
3. Elevator machine beams and hoist beams
4. Steel shapes for supporting elevator door sills
5. Shelf angles
6. Metal ladders
7. Metal bollards
B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section:
1. Loose steel lintels.
2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts
indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance of Aluminum Ladders: Aluminum ladders, including landings, shall
withstand the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in
ANSI A14.3.
B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints,
overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
1. Temperature Change: 120 degree F, ambient; 180 degree F, material surfaces.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
12102M 05 50 00 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN METAL FABRICATIONS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint
and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats
are compatible with one another.
B. Coordinate installation of anchorages and steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete.
Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves,
concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in
concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise
indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
2.2 FERROUS METALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.
C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 NONFERROUS METALS
A. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6.
B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6.
2.4 FASTENERS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior
use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941,
Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.
B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts,
ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.
C. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts,
ASTM F 593; with hex nuts, ASTM F 594; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1.
D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and,
where indicated, flat washers.
12102M 05 50 00 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN METAL FABRICATIONS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being
fastened is indicated to be galvanized.
E. Eyebolts: ASTM A 489.
F. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3.
G. Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.1.
H. Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1.
I. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1.
J. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1.
K. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the
load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in
concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified
independent testing agency.
L. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise
indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or
ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip
galvanized per ASTM F 2329.
M. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors.
1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
N. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) complying
with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than
3 inches long at not more than 8 inches o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee-head bolts,
complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as
needed for fastening to inserts.
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units
only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain
structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to
complete the Work.
B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise
indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive
adjacent construction.
12102M 05 50 00 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN METAL FABRICATIONS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
2.7 SHELF ANGLES
A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete
framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced not more than 6
inches from ends and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide mitered and welded units at corners.
2. Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint
approximately 2 inches larger than expansion or control joint.
B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and
concrete.
C. Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls.
D. Prime shelf angles located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.
E. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-in-
place concrete.
2.8 METAL LADDERS
A. Aluminum Ladders:
1. Space siderails 18 inches apart unless otherwise indicated.
2. Siderails: Continuous extruded-aluminum channels or tubes, not less than 2-1/2 inches
deep, 3/4 inch wide, and 1/8 inch thick.
3. Rungs: Extruded-aluminum tubes, not less than 3/4 inch deep and not less than 1/8 inch
thick, with ribbed tread surfaces.
4. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; fasten by welding or with stainless-steel fasteners or
brackets and aluminum rivets.
5. Support each ladder with welded or bolted aluminum brackets.
2.9 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and
recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths for
each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single
unit where indicated.
B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span
but not less than 8 inches unless otherwise indicated.
C. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.
D. Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.
2.10 METAL BOLLARDS
A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe.
12102M 05 50 00 - 5
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN METAL FABRICATIONS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
1. Where bollards are indicated to receive controls for door operators, provide necessary
cutouts for controls and holes for wire.
2. Where bollards are indicated to receive light fixtures, provide necessary cutouts for
fixtures and holes for wire.
B. Fabricate bollards with 3/8-inch- thick steel baseplates for bolting to concrete slab. Drill
baseplates at all four corners for 3/4-inch anchor bolts.
1. Where bollards are to be anchored to sloping concrete slabs, angle baseplates for plumb
alignment of bollards.
C. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe with 1/4-inch- thick steel plate welded to
bottom of sleeve. Make sleeves not less than 8 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of
bollard.
D. Fabricate internal sleeves for removable bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe or 1/4-inch wall-
thickness steel tubing with an OD approximately 1/16 inch less than ID of bollards. Match drill
sleeve and bollard for 3/4 inch steel machine bolt.
E. Prime bollards with zinc-rich primer.
2.11 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and
recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths for
each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single
unit where indicated.
B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span
but not less than 8 inches unless otherwise indicated.
C. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.
D. Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.
2.12 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel
and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.
1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint
adhesion.
B. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification
No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
12102M 05 50 00 - 6
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN METAL FABRICATIONS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal
fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges
and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and
levels.
3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported,
including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.
B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure.
3.3 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS
A. Fill metal-capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven days before
installing.
B. Above grade installation: Anchor bollards to existing construction with anchor bolts. Provide
four 3/4-inch bolts at each bollard unless otherwise indicated.
1. Embed anchor bolts at least 4 inches in concrete.
C. On grade installation: Anchor bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into
concrete. Fill annular space around bollard solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout; mixed and
placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately
1/8 inch toward bollard.
D. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 05 50 00
12043 05 51 00 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN METAL STAIRS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
SECTION 05 51 00 - METAL STAIRS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Design of steel stairs.
2. Preassembled steel egress stairs
3. Steel tube handrails and railings attached to metal stairs.
4. Railing gates at the level of exit discharge.
B. Stairs and stair components may be manufactured and pre-assembled (drop-in) or shop
fabricated and assembled in the field at Contractor’s option.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design metal stairs, including comprehensive engineering analysis by
a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria
indicated.
B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads
and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated.
1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft.
2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in.
3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in
addition to loads specified above.
5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360 or 1/4 inch,
whichever is less.
a. For general interior egress application and typical switchback designs
with flight widths under 4 feet - 6 inches, the above limit may be
increased to L/240.
C. Structural Performance of Railings: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads
and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated.
1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:
a. Uniform load of 75 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction.
b. Concentrated load of 250 lbf applied in any direction.
12043 05 51 00 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN METAL STAIRS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act
concurrently.
2. Infill of Guards:
a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.
b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
D. Seismic Performance: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. Component Importance Factor is 1.5.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For metal stairs and the following:
1. Metal floor plate treads.
2. Paint products.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work.
1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural
analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
C. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes:
1. Precast concrete treads.
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed
by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.
B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a
qualified testing agency, for stairs and railings.
1. Test railings according ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for metal stairs specified in this Section to be installed by
firm with minimum of 5 years consecutive metal stair erection experience.
B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those
12043 05 51 00 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN METAL STAIRS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
performed for installations of metal stairs (including handrails and railing systems) that
are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal stairs similar to those
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well
as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
D. Design and Fabrication Standards:
1. Fabricate stairs in accordance with the recommendations of "Recommended
Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP-510, for
class of stair designated, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
a. Preassembled Stairs: Commercial class.
2. Fabricate railings in accordance with the recommendations of ANSI/NAAMM
AMP-521. Finish joints in railings accordance with the following National and
Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metal Association (NOMMA) standards.
a. Commercial Stairs, Guard Rails in Occupied Spaces: Type 1
E. Provide same level of quality for railings guarding floor openings as railings connected to
stairs serving opening.
F. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for
Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair
designated, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
1. Commercial class, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
H. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with
paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers
and topcoats are compatible with one another.
B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts,
anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or
masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
C. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they will not en-
croach on required stair width and will be within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure.
12043 05 51 00 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN METAL STAIRS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Manufactured and Preassembled Stairs:
a. Alfab, Inc.
b. American Stair, Inc.
c. Worthington Metal Fabrications.
2. Shop Fabricated and Field Assembled Stairs
a. A steel fabrication shop meeting the requirements of Quality Assurance.
2.2 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise
indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
2.3 FERROUS METALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.
C. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
D. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, either commercial steel,
Type B, or structural steel, Grade 25, unless another grade is required by design loads;
exposed.
E. Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, either commercial steel,
Type B, or structural steel, Grade 30, unless another grade is required by design loads.
2.4 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or
ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into
exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
B. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3.
C. Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.1.
D. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1.
12043 05 51 00 - 5
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN METAL STAIRS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
E. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal
alloy welded.
B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 Sections
C. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd
primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich
primer.
D. Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#18, Zinc-Rich, Organic, and compatible with top-
coat.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Carboline 621; Carboline Company.
b. Amercoat; PPG Industries, Inc.
c. Tneme-Zinc 90-97; Tnemec Company, Inc.
E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20
and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
F. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
G. Nonslip-Aggregate Concrete Finish: Factory-packaged abrasive aggregate made from
fused, aluminum-oxide grits or crushed emery; rustproof and nonglazing; unaffected by
freezing, moisture, or cleaning materials.
H. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185/A 185M, 6 by 6 inches, W1.4 by W1.4, unless other-
wise indicated.
2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings,
clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor
stairs and platforms on supporting structure.
1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated.
2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
B. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble
units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for
reassembly and coordinated installation.
C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a
radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough
areas on exposed surfaces.
12043 05 51 00 - 6
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN METAL STAIRS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
E. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
F. Weld connections to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated.
5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's
"Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 2 welds: completely sanded joint,
some undercutting and pinholes okay.
G. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide
weep holes where water may accumulate.
2.7 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS
A. Stair Framing:
1. Fabricate stringers of steel plates or channels or tubes as indicated on Drawings.
a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel or tube stringers.
2. Construct platforms of steel plate or channel or tube headers and miscellaneous
framing members as needed to comply with performance requirements.
3. Weld stringers to headers; weld framing members to stringers and headers.
4. Where stairs are enclosed by gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies, provide
hanger rods or struts to support landings from floor construction above or below.
Locate hanger rods and struts where they will not encroach on required stair
width and will be within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure.
5. Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting struts
designed for erecting steel stair components before installing masonry.
B. Metal-Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations shown
from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements but not
less than 0.067 inch.
1. Steel Sheet: Galvanized-steel sheet, where indicated.
2. Attach risers and subtreads to stringers with brackets made of steel angles or
bars. Weld brackets to stringers and attach metal pans to brackets by welding,
riveting, or bolting.
a. If required by manufacturer or fabricator, provide tread support brackets
welded, direct to steel stringers.
3. Provide subplatforms of configuration indicated or, if not indicated, the same as
subtreads. Weld subplatforms to platform framing.
12043 05 51 00 - 7
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN METAL STAIRS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
2.8 STAIR RAILINGS
A. Steel Tube Railings: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design,
dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post
spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads.
1. Configuration: 1-1/2-inch-square top and bottom rails, 1-1/2-inch-square posts,
and 1/2-inch-round or square pickets spaced not more than 4 inches clear.
2. Picket Infill: 1/2-inch- square pickets spaced less than 4 inches clear.
B. Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at
connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around
at connections, including at fittings.
1. Finish welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for
Type 2 welds: completely sanded joint, some undercutting and pinholes okay.
C. Form changes in direction of railings as follows:
1. By bending, or
2. By inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.
D. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform
curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member
throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming
exposed surfaces of components.
E. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
F. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close
ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less.
G. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges,
miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to
other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or
masonry work.
1. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated.
a. Posts may be side-mounted.
2. For galvanized railings, provide galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves,
and other ferrous-metal components.
3. For nongalvanized railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings,
brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors embedded in exterior
masonry and concrete construction.
2.9 FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish metal stairs after assembly.
12043 05 51 00 - 8
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN METAL STAIRS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
C. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M
for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron
products.
1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint
adhesion.
2. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in finished Work, unless indicated to
remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and
environmental exposure conditions of installed products:
1. Interior Stairs: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
E. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with
galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise
indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field,
and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where
necessary for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners
for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.
B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from
established lines and levels and free of rack.
C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into
concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections
that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping
size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-
dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
E. Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article.
F. Install precast concrete treads with adhesive supplied by manufacturer.
3.2 INSTALLING RAILINGS
A. Adjust railing systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.
Space posts at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loads. Plumb
posts in each direction. Secure posts and rail ends to building construction as follows:
12043 05 51 00 - 9
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN METAL STAIRS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
1. Anchor posts to steel by welding directly to steel supporting members.
2. Anchor handrail ends to concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded
to rail ends and anchored with postinstalled anchors and bolts.
B. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for
concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. Provide bracket with 1-1/2-inch
clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as
indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. Secure wall
brackets to building construction as follows:
1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and
hanger or lag bolts.
2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.
3. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into studs or wood backing
between studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for
shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.
B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 09 Sections
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 05 51 00
12043 SECTION 055213 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN RAILINGS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
SECTION 05 52 13 - RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Steel tube railings.
2. Balcony railings
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified
professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following
loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:
a. Uniform load of 75 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction.
b. Concentrated load of 250 lbf applied in any direction.
c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals
and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings.
2. Railing brackets.
3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
1.5 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint
and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats
are compatible with one another.
12043 SECTION 055213 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN RAILINGS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items
with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to
Project site in time for installation.
C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support
railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE STEEL FABRICATORS
A. Capitol City Iron Works - Indianapolis IN
B. Allens Steel Products – Arlington TN
C. Paramount Steel Inc. – Houston TX
2.2 CONTRACTORS OPTION - ALUMINUM BALCONY RAILINGS:
A. Provide Series 990 Aluminum Straight Rail by Superior Aluminum Products, Inc. in Russia, OH
or equal. Anchor straight rail to shop fabricated wood newel posts to withstand code required
lateral loads.
B. Provide patterned aluminum ready built rail system to match false balcony rail shown on
drawings.
2.3 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller
marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as
supported rails unless otherwise indicated.
2.4 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide the following:
1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 or
ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating.
2. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel
fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating.
B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and
class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of
construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.
C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:
12043 SECTION 055213 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN RAILINGS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching
them to other work, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching
them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard
fastening method for railings indicated.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,
member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to
support structural loads.
B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly
mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain
structural value of joined pieces.
C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius
of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on
exposed surfaces.
D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide
weep holes where water may accumulate.
F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.
G. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings
designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.
H. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings.
Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.
I. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
J. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends
of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less.
K. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings,
and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.
1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-
resistant fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural
supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.
L. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry
work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings.
Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.
M. For railing posts set in concrete, provide steel sleeves not less than 6 inches long with inside
dimensions not less than 1/2 inch greater than outside dimensions of post, with metal plate
forming bottom closure.
12043 SECTION 055213 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN RAILINGS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
N. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at edge of
open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated.
2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
D. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of
railings.
2.7 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and
other ferrous components.
B. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of
grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.
C. For nongalvanized steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets,
fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or
masonry.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify
that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate
reinforcements and mark locations if not already done.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.
B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in
location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.
1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or
finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other
means without further cutting or fitting.
12043 SECTION 055213 - 5
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN RAILINGS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet.
3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel
with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.
C. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout,
concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.
E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for
securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.
3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS
A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing
components. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored
to match finish of railings.
B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components.
Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is
performed in the shop or in the field.
END OF SECTION 05 52 13
12043 SECTION 055213 - 6
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN RAILINGS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
12043 061000 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ROUGH CARPENTRY
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 ISSUED 12/22/2014
SECTION 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Framing with dimension lumber.
2. Framing with engineered wood products.
3. Shear wall panels.
4. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
5. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.
6. Wood furring and grounds.
7. Wood sleepers.
8. Plywood backing panels.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 06 16 00 "Sheathing."
2. Section 06 17 53 "Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses" for wood trusses made from
dimension lumber.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.
B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in
least dimension.
C. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association.
2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.
3. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
4. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
12043 061000 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ROUGH CARPENTRY
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 ISSUED 12/22/2014
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate
type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include
physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent
testing agency.
3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before
and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent
testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.
4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content
of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of
treatment.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit
stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the
ALSC Board of Review.
B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:
1. Wood-preservative-treated wood.
2. Fire-retardant-treated wood.
3. Engineered wood products.
4. Shear panels.
5. Power-driven fasteners.
6. Powder-actuated fasteners.
7. Expansion anchors.
8. Metal framing anchors.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-
retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that
periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is
representative of the material tested.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide
for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
12043 061000 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ROUGH CARPENTRY
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 ISSUED 12/22/2014
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency
is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on
end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade
compliance issued by grading agency.
3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for
moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed
sizes for dry lumber.
4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, and for
more than 2-inch nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.
C. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that
show compliance with building code in effect for Project.
1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design
stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated.
Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational
engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a
qualified independent testing agency.
2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior
construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in
contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
arsenic or chromium.
2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical
formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise
adversely affect finishes.
B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use
material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board
of Review.
1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of
each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by
inspection agency.
12043 061000 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ROUGH CARPENTRY
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 ISSUED 12/22/2014
D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in
contact with masonry or concrete.
3. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.
2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with
requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-
test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test
method indicated by a qualified testing agency.
B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame
spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of
significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with
the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any
time during the test.
1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.
2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-
retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to
accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where
indicated.
3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less
when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where
exterior type is not indicated.
4. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according
ASTM D 5664 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to
ASTM D 6841.
C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing
agency.
1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of
each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by
testing agency.
E. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations
that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.
F. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Exterior walls, where indicated.
2. Framing for raised platforms.
3. Concealed blocking.
4. Plywood backing panels.
12043 061000 - 5
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ROUGH CARPENTRY
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 ISSUED 12/22/2014
2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING
A. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Stud, or No. 2 grade.
1. Application: Interior partitions not indicated as load-bearing.
2. Species:
a. Spruce-Pine-Fir, NLGA.
B. Load-Bearing Partitions: No. 1 or 2 grade.
1. Application: Exterior walls and interior load-bearing partitions.
2. Species:
a. Spruce-Pine-Fir, NLGA.
C. Ceiling Joists: No. 2 grade.
1. Species:
a. Hem-fir (north); NLGA.
b. Southern pine; SPIB.
c. Douglas fir-larch (north); NLGA.
D. Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: No. 2 grade.
1. Species:
a. Hem-fir (north); NLGA.
b. Southern pine; SPIB.
c. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA.
2.5 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS
A. Engineered Wood Products, General: Products shall contain no urea formaldehyde.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of engineered wood product from single source from a
single manufacturer.
C. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with grain
primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and
manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Boise Cascade Corporation.
b. Georgia-Pacific.
c. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation.
d. Pacific Woodtech Corporation.
e. Weyerhaeuser Company.
2. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2900 psi, 2600 psi for 12-inch nominal-
depth members.
12043 061000 - 6
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ROUGH CARPENTRY
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 ISSUED 12/22/2014
3. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 2,000,000 psi.
D. Parallel-Strand Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood strand elements with
grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456
and manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Weyerhaeuser Company.
2. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2900 psi for 12-inch nominal- depth
members.
3. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 2,000,000 psi.
E. Rim Boards: Product designed to be used as a load-bearing member and to brace wood I-joists
at bearing ends, complying with research/evaluation report for I-joists.
1. Manufacturer: Provide products by same manufacturer as I-joists.
2. Material: Glued-laminated wood.
3. Thickness: 1-1/8 inches or 1-1/4 inches.
4. Provide performance-rated product complying with APA PRR-401, rim board plus grade,
factory marked with APA trademark indicating thickness, grade, and compliance with
APA standard.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other
construction, including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
4. Cants.
5. Furring.
6. Grounds.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber and any of the
following species:
1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA.
2. Southern pine; SPIB.
3. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.
C. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber
of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will
interfere with its attachment and purpose.
D. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to
eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.
E. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots
capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.
12043 061000 - 7
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ROUGH CARPENTRY
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 ISSUED 12/22/2014
2.7 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, C-C Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in
thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness.
2.8 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this article for material and manufacture.
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative
treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating
complying with ASTM A 153 or of Type 304 stainless steel.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: ESR-1539.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.
F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where
indicated, flat washers.
G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in
unit masonry assemblies and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and
inspecting agency.
1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5.
2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and
ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2.
2.9 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or when approved comparable product by one of the following:
1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.
2. KC Metals Products, Inc.
3. Phoenix Metal Products, Inc.
4. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.
5. USP Structural Connectors.
C. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by
manufacturer, that meet or exceed those of basis-of-design products. Manufacturer's published
12043 061000 - 8
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ROUGH CARPENTRY
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 ISSUED 12/22/2014
values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and
demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.
D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G60
coating designation.
1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.
E. Hot-Dip, Heavy-Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653; structural steel (SS), high-strength low-
alloy steel Type A, or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B; G185 coating designation; and not
less than 0.036 inch thick.
1. Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated.
F. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
1. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's
standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
B. Adhesives for Gluing Furring and Sleepers to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying
with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.
C. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2-
propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active
ingredient.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for
attaching other construction.
B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame
Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring
backing panels. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking
of testing agency exposed to view.
E. Shear Wall Panels: Install shear wall panels to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
12043 061000 - 9
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ROUGH CARPENTRY
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 ISSUED 12/22/2014
F. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole.
G. Install sill sealer gasket to form continuous seal between sill plates and foundation walls.
H. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.
I. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures,
specialty items, and trim.
1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where
framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips
not more than 16 inches o.c.
J. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated
and as follows:
1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96
inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close
furred spaces.
2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at
ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. Where fire blocking is not
inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width
as framing members and 2-inch nominal- thickness.
3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to
limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. and to solidly fill space below
partitions.
4. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more
than 20 feet o.c.
K. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with
fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with
function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or
optimum joint arrangement.
L. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated
lumber.
1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.
2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.
M. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the following:
1. ESR - 1539 for power-driven fasteners.
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
N. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails
snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.
O. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with
fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered.
12043 061000 - 10
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ROUGH CARPENTRY
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 ISSUED 12/22/2014
1. Comply with approved fastener patterns where applicable.
2. Use common nails unless otherwise indicated. Drive nails snug but do not countersink
nail heads.
3.2 WOOD GROUND, SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated
and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other
work involved.
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install
continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
D. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not
less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness
of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.
3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION
A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required
for tolerance of finish work.
B. Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install 1-by-3-inch nominal- size furring
vertically at 24 inches o.c.
C. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal- size furring vertically at 16
inches o.c.
3.4 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. General: Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-inch nominal
thickness whose widths equal that of studs. Fasten plates to supporting construction unless
otherwise indicated.
1. For exterior walls, provide 2-by-6-inch nominal- size wood studs spaced as indicated on
the Drawings.
2. For interior partitions and walls, provide 2-by-4-inch nominal- size wood studs spaced as
indicated on the drawings. Provide 2 x 6 studs where indicated on the Drawings.
3. Provide continuous horizontal blocking of partitions more than 96 inches high, using
members of 2-inch nominal thickness and of same width as wall or partitions.
B. Construct corners and intersections with three or more studs, except that two studs may be
used for interior non-load-bearing partitions.
C. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness
equal to width of studs. Support headers on jamb studs. Reference Drawings for header sizes
and number of jamb studs.
12043 061000 - 11
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ROUGH CARPENTRY
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 ISSUED 12/22/2014
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite
protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.
Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes
sufficiently wet that moisture content exceeds that specified, apply EPA-registered borate
treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
END OF SECTION 06 10 00
12043 061600 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SHEATHING
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 ISSUED 12/22/2014
SECTION 06 16 00 - SHEATHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Wall sheathing.
2. Roof sheathing.
3. Subflooring.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels.
2. Section 07 25 00 "Weather Barriers" for water-resistive barrier applied over wall
sheathing.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Evaluation Reports: For following products, from ICC-ES:
1. Preservative-treated plywood.
2. Fire-retardant-treated plywood.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored.
Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
2.2 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS
A. Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2 unless otherwise indicated.
B. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2.
12043 061600 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SHEATHING
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 ISSUED 12/22/2014
C. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness
indicated.
D. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard.
2.3 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior
construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in
contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
arsenic or chromium.
B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
2.4 WALL SHEATHING
A. Oriented-Strand-Board Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing.
1. Span Rating: Not less than 24/16.
2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 7/16 inch.
2.5 ROOF SHEATHING
A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exterior sheathing.
1. Roof slopes greater than or equal to 3 in 12:
a. Span Rating: Not less than 24/16.
b. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 7/16 inch.
2. Roof slopes less than 3:12:
a. Span Rating: 48/24.
b. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 23/32 inch.
B. Oriented-Strand-Board Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing.
1. Roof slopes greater than or equal to 3 in 12.
a. Span Rating: Not less than 24/16.
b. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 7/16 inch.
2. Roof slopes less than 3:12:
a. Span Rating: 48/24.
b. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 23/32 inch.
12043 061600 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SHEATHING
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 ISSUED 12/22/2014
2.6 SUBFLOORING AND UNDERLAYMENT
A. Plywood Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, Underlayment single-
floor panels.
1. Span Rating: Not less than 24 o.c.
2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 23/32 inch.
3. Edge Detail: Tongue and groove.
4. Surface Finish: Fully sanded face.
B. Oriented-Stand-Board Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: Exposure 1 single-floor panels.
1. Span Rating: Not less than 24 o.c.
2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 23/32 inch.
3. Edge Detail: Tongue and groove.
4. Surface Finish: Fully sanded or Resin-impregnated overlay face.
2.7 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this article for material and manufacture.
1. For roof and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with
ASTM A 153.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: ESR-1539.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E. Screws for Fastening Wood Structural Panels to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954,
except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for
material being fastened.
1. For wall and roof sheathing panels, provide screws with organic-polymer or other
corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours
according to ASTM B 117.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01 that is
approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by manufacturers of both adhesives
and panels.
12043 061600 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SHEATHING
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 ISSUED 12/22/2014
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to
use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces
do not span between fewer than three support members.
B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting
construction unless otherwise indicated.
C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."
D. Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood.
E. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and weather barrier installation so
these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from
passing through completed assembly.
F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of
structural support elements.
G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so
sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is
forecast.
END OF SECTION 06 16 00
12043 061753 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 ISSUED 12/22/2014
SECTION 06 17 53 - SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Wood roof trusses.
2. Wood floor trusses.
3. Wood girder trusses.
4. Wood truss bracing.
5. Metal truss accessories.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 06 16 00 "Sheathing" for roof sheathing and subflooring.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses: Planar structural units consisting of metal-plate-
connected members fabricated from dimension lumber and cut and assembled before delivery
to Project site.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for trusses.
1. Show location, pitch, span, camber, configuration, and spacing for each type of truss
required.
2. Indicate sizes, stress grades, and species of lumber.
3. Indicate locations of permanent bracing required to prevent buckling of individual truss
members due to design loads.
4. Indicate locations, sizes, and materials for permanent bracing required to prevent
buckling of individual truss members due to design loads.
5. Indicate type, size, material, finish, design values, orientation, and location of metal
connector plates.
6. Show splice details and bearing details.
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal-plate-connected wood trusses indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
12043 061753 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 ISSUED 12/22/2014
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Metal Connector-Plate Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer that is a member of TPI
and that complies with quality-control procedures in ANSI/TPI 1 for manufacture of connector
plates.
1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services
needed to assume engineering responsibility.
2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that participates in a recognized quality-assurance program that
complies with quality-control procedures in ANSI/TIP 1 and that involves third-party inspection
by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Architect and authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handle and store trusses to comply with recommendations in BCSI, "Building Component
Safety Information: Guide to Good Practice for Handling, Installing, Restraining, & Bracing Metal
Plate Connected Wood Trusses."
1. Store trusses flat, off of ground, and adequately supported to prevent lateral bending.
2. Protect trusses from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored.
3. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
B. Inspect trusses showing discoloration, corrosion, or other evidence of deterioration. Discard
and replace trusses that are damaged or defective.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00
"Quality Requirements," to design metal-plate-connected wood trusses.
B. Structural Performance: Provide metal-plate-connected wood trusses capable of withstanding
design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. Comply with requirements in
ANSI/TPI 1 unless more stringent requirements are specified below.
1. Design Loads: As indicated.
2. Maximum Deflection Under Design Live/Snow Loads:
a. Roof Trusses: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of span.
b. Floor Trusses: Vertical deflection of 1/480 of span.
C. Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of the following publications:
1. ANSI/TPI 1, "National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss
Construction."
2. TPI DSB, "Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate
Connected Wood Trusses."
12043 061753 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 ISSUED 12/22/2014
3. BCSI, "Building Component Safety Information: Guide to Good Practice for Handling,
Installing, Restraining, & Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses."
D. Wood Structural Design Standard: Comply with applicable requirements in AF&PA's "National
Design Specifications for Wood Construction" and its "Supplement."
2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency
is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules writing agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, omit grade stamp and
provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency.
3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S.
4. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing.
B. Permanent Bracing: Provide wood bracing that complies with requirements for miscellaneous
lumber in Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry."
2.3 METAL CONNECTOR PLATES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc.; an ITW company.
2. Cherokee Metal Products, Inc.; Masengill Machinery Company.
3. Eagle Metal Products.
4. MiTek Industries, Inc.; a subsidiary of Berkshire Hathaway Inc.
5. Truswal Systems Corporation; an ITW company.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain metal connector plates from single manufacturer.
C. General: Fabricate connector plates to comply with ANSI/TPI 1.
D. Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591, 80Z coating designation; ASTM A 570,
Structural-Steel Sheet, Grade 33; and not less than 0.047 inch thick.
1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.
E. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, and not less than 0.035 inch thick.
1. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.
2.4 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this article for material and manufacture.
12043 061753 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 ISSUED 12/22/2014
1. Provide fasteners for use with metal framing anchors that comply with written
recommendations of metal framing manufacturer.
2. Where trusses are exposed to weather, or in area of high relative humidity, provide
fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
2.5 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.
2. KC Metals Products, Inc.
3. Phoenix Metal Products, Inc.
4. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.
5. USP Structural Connectors.
B. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by
manufacturer, that meet or exceed those of basis-of-design products. Manufacturer's published
values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and
demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.
C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G60
coating designation.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20, with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent
zinc dust by weight.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles, and sizes to produce close-fitting joints.
B. Fabricate metal connector plates to sizes, configurations, thicknesses, and anchorage details
required to withstand design loads for types of joint designs indicated.
C. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated; use jigs or other means to ensure
uniformity and accuracy of assembly with joints closely fitted to comply with tolerances in
ANSI/TPI 1. Position members to produce design camber indicated.
1. Fabricate wood trusses within manufacturing tolerances in ANSI/TPI 1.
D. Connect truss members by metal connector plates located and securely embedded
simultaneously in both sides of wood members by air or hydraulic press.
12043 061753 - 5
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 ISSUED 12/22/2014
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install wood trusses only after supporting construction is in place and is braced and secured.
B. If trusses are delivered to Project site in more than one piece, assemble trusses before
installing.
C. Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required,
exercising care not to damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane bending or other causes.
D. Install and brace trusses according to TPI & BCSI recommendations and as indicated.
E. Install trusses plumb, square, and true to line and securely fasten to supporting construction.
F. Space trusses as indicated; adjust and align trusses in location before permanently fastening.
G. Anchor trusses securely at bearing points; use metal truss tie-downs or floor truss hangers as
applicable. Install fasteners through each fastener hole in metal framing anchors according to
manufacturer's fastening schedules and written instructions.
H. Securely connect each truss ply required for forming built-up girder trusses.
1. Anchor trusses to girder trusses as indicated, and only after all girder plys are in place
and fastened together as required.
I. Install and fasten permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction loads are
applied. Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or beams.
1. Install bracing to comply with Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry" and BCSI.
2. Install and fasten strongback bracing vertically against vertical web of parallel-chord floor
trusses at centers indicated.
J. Install wood trusses within installation tolerances in BCSI.
K. Do not alter trusses in field. Do not cut, drill, notch, or remove truss members.
L. Replace wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements.
1. Damaged trusses may be repaired according to truss repair details signed and sealed by
the qualified professional engineer responsible for truss design, when approved by
Engineer of Record.
3.2 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on exposed surfaces with galvanized repair paint
according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 06 17 53
12043 06 20 13 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
SECTION 06 20 13 - EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Exterior wood, medium-density overlay (MDO) and foam plastic trim.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and application
details.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product involving selection of colors, profiles, or
textures.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air
circulation. Protect materials from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely
anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecast weather
conditions permit work to be performed and at least one coat of specified finish can be applied
without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness.
B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
12043 06 20 13 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade,
species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
1. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece.
B. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.
C. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4.
2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC3b.
1. Kiln dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 18
percent respectively.
2. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
arsenic or chromium.
3. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated
material.
4. Mark lumber with treatment-quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the
American Lumber Standard Committee's Board of Review.
5. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
6. Application: All exterior lumber and plywood.
2.3 EXTERIOR TRIM
A. Lumber Trim for Painted Finish:
1. Species and Grade: Hem-fir, 1 Common; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
2. Species and Grade: Eastern white pine, eastern hemlock-balsam fir-tamarack, eastern
spruce, or white woods; D Select (Quality); NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
3. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent.
4. Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth).
5. Factory Priming: Factory coated on faces and edges with exterior primer compatible with
topcoats specified.
B. Cellular PVC Trim: Extruded, expanded PVC with a small-cell microstructure, recommended by
manufacturer for exterior use, made from UV- and heat-stabilized, rigid material.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. CertainTeed Corporation; CertainTeed Restoration Millwork.
b. Fypon Ltd.; Fypon PVC.
12043 06 20 13 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
C. Foam Plastic Moldings: Molded product of shapes indicated, recommended by manufacturer
for exterior use, with a tough outer skin on exposed surfaces; factory primed. Exposed surfaces
shall not be shaped after molding.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Fypon Ltd.
b. Melton Classics Incorporated.
c. Vintage Mouldings Manufacturing Ltd.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Back out or kerf backs of standing and running trim wider than 5 inches, except members with
ends exposed in finished work.
B. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch radius and edges of
lumber 1 inch or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch radius.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture
damaged, and mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
B. Prime lumber and moldings to be painted, including both faces and edges, unless factory
primed. Cut to required lengths and prime ends. Comply with requirements in Section 09 91 00
"Painting."
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately
seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements.
1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.
B. Install exterior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use
concealed shims where necessary for alignment.
12043 06 20 13 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
1. Scribe and cut exterior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as
recommended by manufacturer.
2. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining exterior
finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch
maximum offset for reveal installation.
3. Install stairs with no more than 3/16-inch variation between adjacent treads and risers
and with no more than 3/8-inch variation between largest and smallest treads and risers
within each flight.
4. Coordinate exterior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it.
Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate exterior finish
carpentry.
3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Install flat-grain lumber with bark side exposed to weather.
B. Install cellular PVC trim to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Install trim with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum
lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long except where
necessary.
1. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints.
2. Stagger end joints in adjacent and related members.
D. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight-fitting
joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Plane backs of casings to provide
uniform thickness across joints, where necessary for alignment.
E. Where face fastening is unavoidable, countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand unless
otherwise indicated.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Replace exterior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements.
Exterior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and
shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean exterior finish carpentry on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up factory-
applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during construction.
B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
12043 06 20 13 - 5
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 06 20 13
12043 06 20 13 - 6
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
This page intentionally left blank.
12043 SECTION 064300 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN WOOD STAIRS AND RAILINGS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
SECTION 06 43 00 - WOOD STAIRS AND RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Wood stairs and railings, including rough carriages for stairs.
1.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-
scale details, attachment devices, and other components.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver wood stairs and railings until painting and similar operations that could
damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If wood stairs and railings
must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental
conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wood stairs and railings until building
is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining tem-
perature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construc-
tion period.
B. Field Measurements: Where wood stairs and railings are indicated to fit to other con-
struction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrica-
tion, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule
with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork
by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on
Shop Drawings.
C. Established Dimensions: Where wood stairs and railings are indicated to fit to other con-
struction, establish dimensions for areas where woodwork is to fit. Provide allowance for
trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond
to established dimensions.
12043 SECTION 064300 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN WOOD STAIRS AND RAILINGS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
1.07 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other re-
lated units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that wood stairs and railings can
be supported and installed as indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 WOOD MATERIALS
A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality
standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicat-
ed.
1. Do not use plain-sawn softwood lumber with exposed, flat surfaces more than 3
inches wide.
2. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.
2.02 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried
to less than 15 percent moisture content.
B. Rough Carriages for Stairs: No. 1 grade and any of the following species, kiln dried to 15
percent maximum moisture content:
1. Hem-fir (north).
2. Southern pine.
3. Douglas fir-larch (north).
C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure an-
chorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors.
Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior
walls and at floors.
D. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate wood stairs and railings to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease
edges to radius indicated for the following:
1. Corners of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch unless otherwise indicat-
ed.
B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent
possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for
shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance
for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
C. Cut carriages to accurately fit treads and risers. Glue treads to risers, and glue and nail
treads and risers to carriages.
12043 SECTION 064300 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN WOOD STAIRS AND RAILINGS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
1. Fabricate stairs with treads and risers no more than 1/8 inch from indicated posi-
tion and no more than 1/16 inch out of relative position for adjacent treads and
risers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Before installation, condition wood stairs and railings to average prevailing humidity con-
ditions in installation areas.
B. Before installing wood stairs and railings, examine shop-fabricated work for completion
and complete work as required, including removal of packing and back priming.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install wood stairs and railings to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B. Assemble wood stairs and railings and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent
that it was not completed in the shop.
C. Stairs: Securely anchor carriages to supporting substrates. Install stairs with treads and
risers no more than 1/8 inch from indicated position.
3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective wood stairs and railings, where possible, to eliminate
functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace wood stairs and rail-
ings. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean wood stairs and railings on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-
applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION 06 43 00
12043 SECTION 064300 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN WOOD STAIRS AND RAILINGS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
12043 06 46 00 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN WOOD TRIM
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
SECTION 06 46 00 - WOOD TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior standing and running trim.
2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless
concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.
3. Shop priming of wood trim.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, and shims required for
installing wood trim and concealed within other construction before wood trim installation.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
1. Show details full size.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver wood trim until operations that could damage wood trim have been completed in
installation areas. If wood trim must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in
areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions"
Article.
1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations for Interior Work: Do not deliver or install interior wood trim until
building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining
temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction
period.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that wood trim can be supported and
installed as indicated.
12043 06 46 00 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN WOOD TRIM
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
PART 2 - PRODUCTS.
2.1 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH,
A. Grade: Premium
B. Wood Species:
1. Trim – Poplar
2. Base in Units and Fitness - Poplar
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Interior Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture
content.
B. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate wood trim to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius
indicated for the following:
1. Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch unless otherwise indicated.
2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch.
2.4 SHOP PRIMING
A. Interior Wood Trim for Opaque Finish: Shop prime with one coat of wood primer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before installation, condition wood trim to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation
areas.
B. Before installing architectural wood trim, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and
complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install wood trim to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B. Install wood trim level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims.
Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
12043 06 46 00 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN WOOD TRIM
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
C. Scribe and cut wood trim to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish
at cuts.
D. Anchor wood trim to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing.
E. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length
pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective wood trim, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects; where not possible to repair, replace wood trim. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean wood trim on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to
restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION 06 46 00
12043 06 46 00 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN WOOD TRIM
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
This page intentionally left blank.
12043 06 48 00 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN WOOD FRAMES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
SECTION 06 48 00 - WOOD FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior frames and jambs.
2. Shop priming wood frames and jambs.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product, including fire rated labeled doors and frames and
finishing materials and processes.
1. Include authorization from licensed Testing Agency to label 20 minute doors and frames.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-
retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction
that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification
marking is representative of the material tested.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver wood frames until operations that could damage wood frames have been
completed in installation areas. If wood frames must be stored in other than installation areas,
store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field
Conditions" Article.
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations for Exterior Work: Proceed with installation of exterior wood frames only
when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit work to be performed and at least one
coat of specified finish to be applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness.
B. Environmental Limitations for Interior Work: Do not deliver or install interior wood frames until
building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining
temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction
period.
12043 06 48 00 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN WOOD FRAMES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that wood frames can be supported and
installed as indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD FRAMES, GENERAL
A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork
Standards" for grades of wood frames indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other
requirements.
1. Provide labels and certificates indicating that woodwork including installation complies
with requirements of grades specified.
2.2 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A. Grade: Premium
B. Wood Species: Poplar
C. Fire-Rated Interior Frames and Jambs: Products fabricated from fire-retardant particleboard
with veneered exposed surfaces or fire-retardant medium-density fiberboard and listed and
labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire
ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.
1. Fire Rating: 20 minutes.
2.3 WOOD MATERIALS
A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard
for each type of wood frame and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
2.4 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials, General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are
indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined
by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.
1. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of qualified
testing agency in the form of removable paper label or imprint on surfaces that will be
concealed from view after installation.
12043 06 48 00 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN WOOD FRAMES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested
according to ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test
is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet
beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.
1. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Exterior Blocking, Shims, and Nailers: Softwood or hardwood lumber kiln dried to less than 15
percent moisture content and treated where exposed to exterior.
1. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC3b.
a. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
B. Interior Blocking, Shims, and Nailers: Softwood or hardwood lumber kiln dried to less than 15
percent moisture content.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate wood frames to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius
indicated for the following:
2.7 SHOP PRIMING
A. Interior Wood Frames for Opaque Finish: Shop prime with one coat of wood primer.
B. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling
countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing wood
frames, as applicable to each unit of work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before installation, condition wood frames to average prevailing humidity conditions in
installation areas.
B. Before installing wood frames, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work
as required, including removal of packing and back priming.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install wood frames to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B. Assemble wood frames and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not
completed in the shop.
12043 06 48 00 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN WOOD FRAMES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
C. Install wood frames level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims.
Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
D. Scribe and cut wood frames to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged
finish at cuts.
E. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated wood to comply
with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used
to install woodwork.
F. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of wood frames. Fill nail holes
with matching filler where exposed.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective wood frames, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects; where not possible to repair, replace wood frames. Adjust joinery for uniform
appearance.
B. Clean wood frames on exposed and semi exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to
restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION 06 48 00
12043 07 21 00 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN THERMAL INSULATION
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
SECTION 07 21 00 - THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Foam-plastic board insulation.
2. Glass-fiber blanket insulation.
3. Vapor retarders.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07 54 23 "TPO Roofing" for insulation specified as part of roofing construction.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture,
soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's
written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION
A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and minimum compressive
strength indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and
450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Dow Chemical Company (The).
b. Owens Corning.
12043 07 21 00 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN THERMAL INSULATION
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
2. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation equal to Formular 250, Type IV, 25 psi,
Foundation Insulation, R=5 per inch,
2.2 BATT INSULATION
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. CertainTeed Corporation.
2. Guardian Building Products, Inc.
3. Johns Manville.
4. Owens Corning.
B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread
and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing
ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. Equal to Owens Corning EcoTouch formaldehyde
free pink Fiberglas insulation with R-Values listed on the drawings.
C. Kraft-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type II (non-reflective faced),
Class C (faced surface not rated for flame propagation); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor
barrier).
2.3 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 10 mils thick, with maximum permeance rating
of 0.13 perm.
B. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
C. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type I, Grade NS, Class 25,
Use NT related to exposure, and Use O related to vapor-barrier-related substrates.
D. Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer and has
demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including
removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation
attachment.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and
applications indicated.
12043 07 21 00 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN THERMAL INSULATION
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice,
rain, or snow at any time.
C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions
and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard
thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness
indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written
instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use
mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B. Glass-Fiber or Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members
according to the following requirements:
1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If
more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a
snug fit between ends.
2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between
edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or
protected from contact with insulation.
4. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at
vented eaves.
5. For wood-framed construction, install blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as follows:
a. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, secure insulation by inset, stapling
flanges to sides of framing members.
b. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of
adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish material is
installed over it.
6. Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder facings, and
seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation.
a. Exterior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward interior of construction.
C. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where
required to prevent gaps in insulation:
3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN CEILINGS FOR SOUND ATTENUATION
A. Where glass-fiber blankets are indicated for sound attenuation above ceilings, install blanket
insulation over entire ceiling area in thicknesses indicated. Extend insulation 48 inches up
either side of partitions.
12043 07 21 00 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN THERMAL INSULATION
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
3.5 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Place vapor retarders on side of construction indicated on Drawings. Extend vapor retarders to
extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor retarders in place with
adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarders to cover
miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.
B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs.
1. Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of
wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches o.c.
2. Before installing vapor retarders, apply urethane sealant to flanges of metal framing
including runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and window openings.
Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-
retarder manufacturer's written instructions. Seal butt joints with vapor-retarder tape.
Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates.
3. Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor-retarder
fasteners as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer.
C. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor
retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and
vapor retarders.
D. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work.
Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders.
END OF SECTION 07 21 00
12043 07 24 00 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
SECTION 07 24 00 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS) applied over plywood sheathing.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Class PB EIFS: A non-load-bearing, exterior wall cladding system that consists of an
insulation board attached adhesively, mechanically, or both to the substrate; an integrally
reinforced base coat; and a textured protective finish coat.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. EIFS Performance: Comply with the following:
1. Bond Integrity: Free from bond failure within EIFS components or between
system and supporting wall construction, resulting from exposure to fire, wind
loads, weather, or other in-service conditions.
2. Weathertightness: Resistant to water penetration from exterior into EIFS and
assemblies behind it or through them into interior of building that results in
deterioration of thermal-insulating effectiveness or other degradation of EIFS and
assemblies behind it, including substrates, supporting wall construction, and
interior finish.
B. Class PB EIFS: Provide EIFS having physical properties and structural performance that
comply with the following:
1. Abrasion Resistance: Sample consisting of 1-inch- thick EIFS mounted on 1/2-
inch- thick gypsum board; cured for a minimum of 28 days; and showing no
cracking, checking, or loss of film integrity after exposure to 528 quarts of sand
when tested per ASTM D 968, Method A.
2. Absorption-Freeze Resistance: No visible deleterious effects and negligible
weight loss after 60 cycles per EIMA 101.01.
3. Accelerated Weathering: Five samples per ICC-ES AC219 showing no cracking,
checking, crazing, erosion, rusting, blistering, peeling, delamination, or other
12043 07 24 00 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
characteristics that might affect performance as a wall cladding after testing for
2000 hours when viewed under 5 times magnification per ASTM G 153 or
ASTM G 155 .
4. Freeze-Thaw: No surface changes, cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, rusting,
blistering, peeling, or delamination, or indications of delamination between
components when viewed under 5 times magnification after 10 cycles per ICC-
ES AC219.
5. Mildew Resistance of Finish Coat: Sample applied to 2-by-2-inch clean glass
substrate, cured for 28 days, and showing no growth when tested per
ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274.
6. Salt-Spray Resistance: No deleterious effects when tested according to ICC-
ES AC219.
7. Tensile Adhesion: No failure in the EIFS, adhesive, base coat, or finish coat
when tested per ICC-ES AC219.
8. Water Penetration: Sample consisting of 1-inch- thick EIFS mounted on 1/2-
inch-thick gypsum board, cured for 28 days, and showing no water penetration
into the plane of the base coat to expanded-polystyrene board interface of the
test specimen after 15 minutes at 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. of air pressure difference or 20
percent of positive design wind pressure, whichever is greater, across the
specimen during a test period when tested per EIMA 101.02.
9. Water Resistance: Three samples, each consisting of 1-inch- thick EIFS
mounted on 1/2-inch- thick gypsum board; cured for 28 days; and showing no
cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, rusting, blistering, peeling, or delamination
after testing for 14 days per ASTM D 2247.
10. Wind-Driven-Rain Resistance: Resist wind-driven rain according to ICC-
ES AC219.
11. Structural Performance Testing: EIFS assembly and components shall comply
with ICC-ES AC219 when tested per ASTM E 330.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and component of EIFS indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For EIFS. Include plans, elevations, sections, details of components,
details of penetration and termination, flashing details, joint locations and configurations,
fastening and anchorage details including mechanical fasteners, and connections and
attachments to other work.
C. Samples for Verification: 12-inch- square panels for each type of finish-coat color and
texture indicated, prepared using same tools and techniques intended for actual work
including an aesthetic reveal, a typical control joint filled with sealant of color selected.
1. Include sealants and exposed accessory Samples to verify color selected.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency.
B. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that EIFS comply with
requirements.
C. Material or Product Certificates: For cementitious materials and aggregates and for each
insulation and joint sealant, from manufacturer.
12043 07 24 00 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a
qualified testing agency, for each water-/weather-resistive barrier, insulation, reinforcing
mesh, joint sealant, and coating.
E. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: For joint sealants from sealant manufacturer
indicating the following:
1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for
compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.
2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and
substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
F. Field quality-control reports.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For EIFS to include in maintenance manuals.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An installer who is certified in writing by EIFS manufacturer as
qualified to install manufacturer's system using trained workers.
1. Fabricator/Erector Qualifications: Certified in writing by EIFS manufacturer as
qualified to fabricate and erect manufacturer's prefabricated panel system using
skilled and trained workers.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain EIFS from single source from single EIFS manufacturer and
from sources approved by EIFS manufacturer as compatible with system components.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide EIFS and system components with the
following fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical EIFS and
system components per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with
appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Provide materials and construction tested for
fire resistance per ASTM E 119.
2. Intermediate-Scale Multistory Fire Test: Tested mockup, representative of
completed multistory wall assembly of which EIFS is a part, complies with
NFPA 285 for test method and required fire-test-response characteristics of
exterior non-load-bearing wall panel assemblies containing foam-plastic
insulation.
3. Radiant Heat Exposure: No ignition of EIFS when tested according to
NFPA 268.
4. Potential Heat: Acceptable level when tested according to NFPA 259.
5. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide insulation board, adhesives, base
coats, and finish coats with flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-
developed index of 450 or less, per ASTM E 84.
D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution and
set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
12043 07 24 00 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original, unopened packages with manufacturers' labels intact and
clearly identifying products.
B. Store materials inside and under cover; keep them dry and protected from weather, direct
sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, damaging temperatures, construction
traffic, and other causes.
1. Stack insulation board flat and off the ground.
2. Protect plastic insulation against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic
insulating materials to Project site before installation time.
3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible
in each area of construction.
1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degree F for a minimum
of 24 hours before, during, and after adhesives or coatings are applied. Do not apply
EIFS adhesives or coatings during rainfall. Proceed with installation only when existing
and forecasted weather conditions and ambient outdoor air, humidity, and substrate
temperatures permit EIFS to be applied, dried, and cured according to manufacturers'
written instructions and warranty requirements.
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of EIFS with related Work specified in other Sections to ensure
that wall assemblies, including sheathing, weather-resistant sheathing paper, flashing,
trim, joint sealants, windows, and doors, are protected against damage from the effects of
weather, age, corrosion, moisture, and other causes. Do not allow water to penetrate
behind flashing and barrier coating of EIFS.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Dryvit Systems, Inc.
2. Finestone; Degussa Wall Systems, Inc.
3. Sto Corp.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Compatibility: Provide adhesive, fasteners, board insulation, reinforcing meshes, base-
and finish-coat systems, sealants, and accessories that are compatible with one another
and with substrates and approved for use by EIFS manufacturer for Project.
12043 07 24 00 - 5
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
B. Primer/Sealer: EIFS manufacturer's standard substrate conditioner designed to seal
substrates from moisture penetration and to improve the bond between substrate of type
indicated and adhesive used for application of insulation.
C. Water/Weather Barrier:
1. Joint Compound: Ready mixed flexible joint compound for rough opening
protection and joint treatment of wall sheathing (not required for
concrete/masonry surfaces).
a. Basis of Design: Sto Gold Fill®.
2. Waterproof Coating: Ready mixed waterproof coating for wall substrates and
sheathings.
a. Basis of Design: Sto Gold Coat®
D. Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Cold-applied, fully self-adhering, self-healing, rubberized-
asphalt and polyethylene-film composite sheet or tape and primer; EIFS manufacturer's
standard or product recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer.
E. Insulation Adhesive: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation designed for indicated
use; compatible with substrate; and complying with one of the following:
1. Job-mixed formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I,
and polymer-based adhesive specified for base coat.
2. Factory-blended dry formulation of portland cement, dry polymer admixture, and
fillers specified for base coat.
3. Factory-mixed noncementitious formulation designed for adhesive attachment of
insulation to substrates of type indicated, as recommended by EIFS
manufacturer.
F. Molded, Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Board Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 578, Type I;
EIFS manufacturer's requirements; and EIMA's "EIMA Guideline Specification for
Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation Board" for most stringent requirements for
material performance and qualities of insulation, including dimensions and permissible
variations, and the following:
1. Aging: Before cutting and shipping, age insulation in block form by air drying for
not less than six weeks or by another method approved by EIMA that produces
equivalent results.
2. Flame-Spread and Smoke-Developed Indexes: 25 and 450 or less, respectively,
per ASTM E 84.
3. Dimensions: Provide insulation boards not more than 24 by 48 inches and in
thickness indicated, but not more than 4 inches thick or less than thickness
allowed by ASTM C 1397.
4. Foam Shapes: Provide with profiles and dimensions indicated on Drawings.
G. Base-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard mixture complying with one of the
following:
1. Job-mixed formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I,
white or natural color; and manufacturer's standard polymer-emulsion adhesive
designed for use with portland cement.
12043 07 24 00 - 6
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
2. Factory-mixed noncementitious formulation of polymer-emulsion adhesive and
inert fillers that is ready to use without adding other materials.
H. Primer: EIFS manufacturer's standard factory-mixed, elastomeric-polymer primer for
preparing base-coat surface for application of finish coat.
I. Finish-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard acrylic-based coating complying
with the following:
1. Factory-mixed formulation of polymer-emulsion binder, colorfast mineral
pigments, sound stone particles, and fillers.
2. Sealer: Manufacturer's waterproof, clear acrylic-based sealer for protecting finish
coat.
3. Colors: Match Architect's samples.
J. Water: Potable.
K. Mechanical Fasteners: EIFS manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant fasteners
consisting of thermal cap, standard washer and shaft attachments, and fastener indicated
below; selected for properties of pullout, tensile, and shear strength required to resist
design loads of application indicated; capable of pulling fastener head below surface of
insulation board; and of the following description:
1. For attachment, provide manufacturer's standard fasteners suitable for substrate.
L. Trim Accessories: Type as designated or required to suit conditions indicated and to
comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions; manufactured from UV-stabilized
PVC; and complying with ASTM D 1784, manufacturer's standard Cell Class for use
intended, and ASTM C 1063.
1. Casing Bead: Prefabricated, one-piece type for attachment behind insulation, of
depth required to suit thickness of coating and insulation, with face leg perforated
for bonding to coating and back leg.
2. Drip Screed/Track: Prefabricated, one-piece type for attachment behind
insulation with face leg extended to form a drip, of depth required to suit
thickness of coating and insulation, with face leg perforated for bonding to
coating and back leg.
3. Expansion Joint: Prefabricated, one-piece V profile; designed to relieve stress of
movement.
4. Window Sill Flashing: Prefabricated type for both flashing and sloping sill over
framing beneath windows; with end and back dams; designed to direct water to
exterior.
5. Parapet Cap Flashing: Type for both flashing and covering parapet top with
design complying with ASTM C 1397.
2.3 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
A. Elastomeric Sealant Products: Provide EIFS manufacturer's listed and recommended
chemically curing, elastomeric sealant that is compatible with joint fillers, joint substrates,
and other related materials, and complies with requirements for products and testing
indicated in ASTM C 1481 and with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for
products corresponding to description indicated below:
1. Multicomponent, nonsag urethane sealant.
12043 07 24 00 - 7
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
2. Single-component, nonsag, neutral-curing silicone sealant.
B. Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.4 MIXING
A. General: Comply with EIFS manufacturer's requirements for combining and mixing
materials. Do not introduce admixtures, water, or other materials except as
recommended by EIFS manufacturer. Mix materials in clean containers. Use materials
within time period specified by EIFS manufacturer or discard.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
EIFS.
B. Examine roof edges, wall framing, flashings, openings, substrates, and junctures at other
construction for suitable conditions where EIFS will be installed.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Begin coating application only after surfaces are dry.
2. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling caused by application of
EIFS. Provide temporary covering and other protection needed to prevent spattering of
exterior finish coats on other work.
B. Protect EIFS, substrates, and wall construction behind them from inclement weather
during installation. Prevent penetration of moisture behind EIFS and deterioration of
substrates.
C. Prepare and clean substrates to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions to
obtain optimum bond between substrate and adhesive for insulation.
1. Concrete Substrates: Provide clean, dry, neutral-pH substrate for insulation
installation. Verify suitability of substrate by performing bond and moisture tests
recommended by EIFS manufacturer.
3.3 EIFS INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions for installation of
EIFS as applicable to each type of substrate indicated.
12043 07 24 00 - 8
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
3.4 SUBSTRATE PROTECTION APPLICATION
A. Water/Weather Barrier: Apply over substrates to protect substrates from degradation and
to provide water-/weather-resistive barrier. Comply with manufacturer’s written
instructions for installation over various substrates.
1. Tape and seal joints, exposed edges, terminations, and inside and outside
corners of sheathing unless otherwise indicated by EIFS manufacturer's written
instructions.
2. Coordinate installation of connecting barrier components with other trades to
provide a continuous air tight membrane.
3. Coordinate installation of flashing and other moisture protection components with
other trades to achieve complete moisture protection such that water is direct to
the exterior.
B. Starter Track: Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for installation of starer
track at base of wall and other EIFS terminations as designated on detail drawings or
where indicated by Archtitect.
C. Backwrapping: Apply a strip of detail mesh to the water/weather barrier at all system
terminations except where the starter track is installed. Provide a minimum of 4 inches of
mesh onto the wall to be able to wrap around the insulation board and cover a minimum
of 2-1/2 inches on the outside face of the insulation board. Pre-wrap terminating edges of
insulation board.
D. Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Install over weather-resistive barrier, applied and lapped to
shed water; seal at openings, penetrations, terminations, and where indicated by EIFS
manufacturer's written instructions to protect wall assembly from degradation. Prime
substrates, if required, and install flashing to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written
instructions and details.
3.5 TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Trim: Apply trim accessories at perimeter of EIFS, at expansion joints, and elsewhere as
indicated, according to EIFS manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate with
installation of insulation.
1. Drip Screed/Track: Use at bottom edges of EIFS unless otherwise indicated.
2. Window Sill Flashing: Use at windows unless otherwise indicated.
3. Expansion Joint: Use where indicated on Drawings.
4. Casing Bead: Use at other locations.
5. Parapet Cap Flashing: Use where indicated on Drawings.
2. All trim and projecting architectural features must have a minimum 1:2 [27 de-
gree] slope along their top surface. All horizontal reveals must have a minimum
1:2 [27 degree] slope along their bottom surface. Increase slope for northern
climates to prevent accumulation of ice/snow and water on surface. Where
trim/feature or bottom surface of reveal projects more than 2 inches (51 mm)
from the face of the EIFS wall plane, protect the top surface with waterproof base
coat.
3. Do not use EIFS on weather exposed projecting ledges, sills, or other projecting
features unless supported by framing or other structural support and protected
with metal coping or flashing.
12043 07 24 00 - 9
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
3.6 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Board Insulation: Adhesively and mechanically attach insulation to substrate in
compliance with ASTM C 1397, EIFS manufacturer's written instructions, and the
following:
1. Apply adhesive to insulation by notched-trowel method in a manner that results in
coating the entire surface of sheathing with adhesive once insulation is adhered
to sheathing unless EIFS manufacturer's written instructions specify using
primer/sealer with ribbon-and-dab method. Apply adhesive to a thickness of not
less than 1/4 inch for factory mixed and not less than 3/8 inch for field mixed,
measured from surface of insulation before placement.
a. Apply adhesive in vertical ribbons as directed by manufacturer for water
management of system.
2. Press and slide insulation into place. Apply pressure over the entire surface of
insulation to accomplish uniform contact, high initial grab, and overall level
surface.
3. Allow adhered insulation to remain undisturbed for period recommended by EIFS
manufacturer, but not less than 24 hours, before installing mechanical fasteners,
beginning rasping and sanding insulation, or applying base coat and reinforcing
mesh.
4. Mechanically attach insulation to substrate by method complying with EIFS
manufacturer's written instructions. Install top surface of fastener heads flush
with plane of insulation. Install fasteners into or through substrates with the
following minimum penetration:
a. Wood Framing: 1 inch.
b. Concrete and Masonry: 1 inch.
5. Apply insulation over dry substrates in courses with long edges of boards
oriented horizontally unless recommended otherwise by manufacturer.
6. Begin first course of insulation from a level base line and work upward.
7. Begin first course of insulation from screed/track and work upward. Work from
perimeter casing beads toward interior of panels if possible.
8. Stagger vertical joints of insulation boards in successive courses to produce
running bond pattern. Locate joints so no piece of insulation is less than 12
inches wide or 6 inches high. Offset joints not less than 6 inches from corners of
window and door openings.
a. Adhesive Attachment: Offset joints of insulation not less than 6 inches
from horizontal and 4 inches from vertical joints in sheathing.
b. Mechanical Attachment: Offset joints of insulation from horizontal joints
in sheathing.
9. Interlock ends at internal and external corners.
10. Abut insulation tightly at joints within and between each course to produce flush,
continuously even surfaces without gaps or raised edges between boards. If
gaps greater than 1/16 inch occur, fill with insulation cut to fit gaps exactly; insert
insulation without using adhesive or other material.
11. Cut insulation to fit openings, corners, and projections precisely and to produce
edges and shapes complying with details indicated.
12. Rasp or sand flush entire surface of insulation to remove irregularities projecting
more than 1/16 inch from surface of insulation and to remove yellowed areas due
to sun exposure; do not create depressions deeper than 1/16 inch.
12043 07 24 00 - 10
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
13. Cut aesthetic reveals in outside face of insulation with high-speed router and bit
configured to produce grooves, rabbets, and other features that comply with
profiles and locations indicated. Do not reduce insulation thickness at aesthetic
reveals to less than 3/4 inch.
14. Install foam shapes and attach to sheathing.
15. Interrupt insulation for expansion joints where indicated.
16. Form joints for sealant application by leaving gaps between adjoining insulation
edges and between insulation edges and dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make
gaps wide enough to produce joint widths indicated after encapsulating joint
substrates with base coat and reinforcing mesh.
17. Form joints for sealant application with back-to-back casing beads for joints
within EIFS and with perimeter casing beads at dissimilar adjoining surfaces.
Make gaps between casing beads and between perimeter casing beads and
adjoining surfaces of width indicated.
18. Treat exposed edges of insulation as follows:
a. Except for edges forming substrates of sealant joints, encapsulate with
base coat, reinforcing mesh, and finish coat.
b. Encapsulate edges forming substrates of sealant joints within EIFS or
between EIFS and other work with base coat and reinforcing mesh.
c. At edges trimmed by accessories, extend base coat, reinforcing mesh,
and finish coat over face leg of accessories.
19. Coordinate installation of flashing and insulation to produce wall assembly that
does not allow water to penetrate behind flashing and EIFS protective-coating
lamina.
B. Expansion Joints: Install at locations indicated, where required by EIFS manufacturer,
and as follows:
1. At expansion joints in substrates behind EIFS.
2. Where EIFS adjoin dissimilar substrates, materials, and construction, including
other EIFS.
3. At floor lines in multilevel wood-framed construction.
4. Where wall height or building shape changes.
5. Where EIFS manufacturer requires joints in long continuous elevations.
3.7 BASE-COAT INSTALLATION
A. Base Coat: Apply to exposed surfaces of insulation and foam shapes in minimum
thickness recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer, but not less than 1/16-inch dry-
coat thickness.
B. Allow base coat to thoroughly dry before applying primer or finish.
3.8 FINISH-COAT INSTALLATION
A. Primer: Apply over dry base coat according to EIFS manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Finish Coat: Apply over drybase coat, maintaining a wet edge at all times for uniform
appearance, in thickness required by EIFS manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of
color and texture matching approved sample and free of cold joints, shadow lines, and
texture variations.
12043 07 24 00 - 11
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
1. Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
C. Sealer Coat: Apply over dry finish coat, in number of coats and thickness required by
EIFS manufacturer.
3.9 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. Prepare joints and apply sealants, of type and at locations indicated, to comply with
applicable requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" and in ASTM C 1481.
1. Apply joint sealants after base coat has cured but before applying finish coat.
2. Clean surfaces to receive sealants to comply with indicated requirements and
EIFS manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Apply primer recommended in writing by sealant manufacturer for surfaces to be
sealed.
4. Install sealant backing to control depth and configuration of sealant joint and to
prevent sealant from adhering to back of joint.
5. Apply masking tape to protect areas adjacent to sealant joints. Remove tape
immediately after tooling joints, without disturbing joint seal.
6. Recess sealant sufficiently from surface of EIFS so an additional sealant applica-
tion, including cylindrical sealant backing, can be installed without protruding
beyond EIFS surface.
3.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary covering and protection of other work. Promptly remove coating
materials from window and door frames and other surfaces outside areas indicated to
receive EIFS coatings. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner
acceptable to Installer and EIFS manufacturer that ensure that EIFS are without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 07 24 00
12043 07 24 00 - 12
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
This page intentionally left blank.
12043 07 25 00 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN WEATHER BARRIERS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
SECTION 07 25 00 - WEATHER BARRIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Building wrap.
2. Seam Tape.
3. Flexible flashing.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 06 16 33 "Sheathing" for sheathing joint and penetration treatment.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Evaluation Reports: For water-resistive barrier and flexible flashing, from ICC-ES.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER AND FLASHINGS
A. Building Wrap: AC38, Type I air barrier; with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of
less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV stabilized; and
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Styrofoam Weathermate Plus Brand Housewrap.
b. DuPont (E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company); Tyvek Commercial Wrap.
c. James Hardie Building Products; HardieWrap Weather Barrier
B. Moisture Air Barrier Sheet:
1. Composition: Non-woven, non-perforated polyolefin.
2. Film: Coating with micropores to balance water holdout and breathability.
12043 07 25 00 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN WEATHER BARRIERS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
3. Thickness: 11 mil (0.28 mm).
4. UV Stability: Up to 180 days
5. Water Holdout (AATCC127): 128 inches (3250 mm).
6. Breathability/Water Vapor Permeance (ASTM E-96A): 15 perms
7. Air Resistance (TAPPI T-460): >1800 sec/100 cc
C. Self-adhering Flashing: Designed for peel and stick application.
1. Composition: Butyl rubber adhesive non-woven polyolefin backing; coated Kraft paper
release.
2. Total Thickness: 25 mil (0.64 mm).
3. Packaging: Individually shrink-wrapped.
4. UV Stability: Up to 180 days
D. Flexible Flashing:
1. Composition: Butyl rubber adhesive; creped cross-laminated polyolefin backing;
polyethylene film release.
2. Total Thickness: 60 mil (1.5 mm
3 Tensile Strength (ASTM D3759): 18 lb/inch (3.2kg/cm).
4 Water Vapor Transfer Rate (ASTM E96-94): <.2g/100 square inches/24hrs
E. Seam Tape:
1. Composition: Polypropylene film coated with acrylic adhesive Total Thickness: 3.0 mil
(.08 mm).
2. Adhesion Peel to HardieWrap (PSTC-1): 22 oz/inch (25 N/100 mm
3. Tensile Strength (ASTM D3759): 32 lb/in (.58 kg/mm).
4. Elongation: 136 percent.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER INSTALLATION
A. Cover exposed exterior surface of sheathing with water-resistive barrier securely fastened to
framing immediately after sheathing is installed.
B. Cover sheathing with water-resistive barrier as follows:
1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion-
or control-joint locations.
C. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape.
2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape.
3.2 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
12043 07 25 00 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN WEATHER BARRIERS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
END OF SECTION 07 25 00
12043 07 25 00 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN WEATHER BARRIERS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
This page intentionally left blank.
12043 07 46 00 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SIDING AND SYNTHETIC WOOD TRIM
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
SECTION 07 46 00 – SIDING AND SYNTHETIC WOOD TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fiber-cement panel and siding.
2. Fiber-cement trim.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, grounds, nailers, and blocking.
2. Section 06 16 33 "Sheathing" for wall sheathing and weather-resistive barriers.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Samples for Verification: For each type, color, texture, and pattern required.
1. 12-inch- long-by-actual-width Sample of siding
2. 12-inch- long-by-actual-width Samples of trim and accessories.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For each type of siding and soffit and related accessories to include in
maintenance manuals.
1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Furnish full lengths of siding and soffit including related accessories, in a quantity equal
to 2 percent of amount installed.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Labeling: Provide fiber-cement siding that is tested and labeled according to ASTM C 1186 by
a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type, color, texture, and pattern of siding and soffit, including
related accessories, from single source from single manufacturer.
12043 07 46 00 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SIDING AND SYNTHETIC WOOD TRIM
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight place.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proper
sequencing.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace siding and
soffit that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including cracking, deforming, and fading.
2. Warranty Period: 25 years from date of Substantial Completion.
a. Trim warranty shall be 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING
A. General: ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II, fiber-cement board, noncombustible when tested
according to ASTM E 136; with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to
ASTM E 84.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. CertainTeed Corporation.
b. GAF Materials Corporation.
c. James Hardie Building Products, Inc
2. Horizontal Pattern: Select Cedarmill 7-1/4 inches (184 mm) with 6 inches (152 mm)
exposure.
B. Factory Priming: Manufacturer's standard acrylic primer unless pre-finished.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Siding Accessories, General: Provide starter strips, edge trim, outside and inside corner caps,
and other items as recommended by siding manufacturer for building configuration.
1. Provide accessories adjacent siding unless otherwise indicated.
12043 07 46 00 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SIDING AND SYNTHETIC WOOD TRIM
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
B. Decorative Accessories: Provide the following fiber-cement decorative accessories as
indicated:
1. Door and window casings.
2. Entrance and window head pediments.
3. Louvers.
4. Fasciae.
5. Moldings and trim.
C. Colors for Decorative Accessories: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
industry colors.
D. Flashing: Provide flashing with at window and door heads and where indicated.
2.3 FIBER CEMENT PANEL
A. General: ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II, fiber cement board, noncombustible when tested
according to ASTM E 136; with a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to
ASTM E 84.
1. Basis-of-Design Product – James Hardie: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide or comparable product by one of the following:
a. CertainTeed Corp.
b. GAF Materials Corporation
c. Additional manufacturers as accepted by the Owner
2. Factory Priming: Manufacturer’s standard acrylic primer unless prefinished
3. Trim: Trim for fiber cement panel shall be “EZ Trim” or comparable product.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of siding and soffit and related accessories.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with siding and soffit manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable
to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.
1. Do not install damaged components.
2. Center nails in elongated nailing slots without binding siding to allow for thermal
movement.
B. Install fiber-cement siding and soffit and related accessories.
12043 07 46 00 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SIDING AND SYNTHETIC WOOD TRIM
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
C. Install joint sealants as specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" and to produce a
weathertight installation.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective materials and replace with new
materials complying with specified requirements.
B. Clean finished surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean
condition during construction.
END OF SECTION 07 46 00
12043 07 54 23 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN (TPO) ROOFING MECHANICALLY FASTENED
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
SECTION 07 54 23 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING MECHANICALLY FASTENED
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Mechanically fastened TPO membrane roofing system.
2. Vapor retarder.
3. Roof insulation.
B. Contractor’s Options:
1. Roof insulation may be polyisocyanurate or extruded polystyrene.
a. Either method requires a cover board.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. TPO: Thermoplastic polyolefin.
B. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing
and Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Installed membrane roofing and base flashings shall withstand
specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without
failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in
construction. Membrane roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight.
B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another
under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by membrane
roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
12043 07 54 23 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN (TPO) ROOFING MECHANICALLY FASTENED
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
1. Base flashings and membrane terminations.
2. Tapered insulation, including slopes.
3. Roof plan showing orientation of steel roof deck and orientation of membrane
roofing and fastening spacings and patterns for mechanically fastened mem-
brane roofing.
4. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by
roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to
receive manufacturer's warranty.
C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by
manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of membrane
roofing system.
D. Field quality-control reports.
E. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is UL listed for membrane
roofing system identical to that used for this Project.
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by
membrane roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is
eligible to receive manufacturer's special warranty.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain components including fasteners for membrane roofing
system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or approved by membrane roofing
manufacturer.
D. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108, Class A; for application and roof slopes
indicated, as determined by testing identical membrane roofing materials by a qualified
testing agency. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable
testing agency.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and
labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture,
12043 07 54 23 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN (TPO) ROOFING MECHANICALLY FASTENED
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other
components.
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected
location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer.
Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight.
1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its
stated shelf life.
C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight,
moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent
deflection of deck.
1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted
weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's
written instructions and warranty requirements.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard or customized form, without monetary limitation, in
which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system
that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Total systems warranty includes membrane roofing, base flashings, roof
insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate board, roofing accessories, and
other components of membrane roofing system.
2. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TPO MEMBRANE ROOFING
A. Fabric-Reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin Sheet: ASTM D 6878, internally fabric or
scrim reinforced, uniform, flexible TPO sheet.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following :
a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.
b. Custom Seal Roofing.
c. Firestone Building Products Company.
d. GAF Materials Corporation.
e. GenFlex Roofing Systems.
f. Johns Manville.
g. Mule-Hide Products Co., Inc.
12043 07 54 23 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN (TPO) ROOFING MECHANICALLY FASTENED
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
h. Stevens Roofing Systems; Division of JPS Elastomerics.
i. Versico Incorporated.
2. Thickness: 45 mils, nominal.
3. Exposed Face Color: White.
4. Physical Properties:
a. Breaking Strength: 225 lbf; ASTM D 751, grab method.
b. Elongation at Break: 15 percent; ASTM D 751.
c. Tearing Strength: 55 lbf minimum; ASTM D 751, Procedure B.
d. Brittleness Point: Minus 22 degree F.
e. Ozone Resistance: No cracks after sample, wrapped around a 3-inch-
diameter mandrel, is exposed for 166 hours to a temperature of
104 degree F and an ozone level of 100 pphm; ASTM D 1149.
f. Resistance to Heat Aging: 90 percent minimum retention of breaking
strength, elongation at break, and tearing strength after 166 hours at
240 degree F; ASTM D 573.
g. Water Absorption: Less than 4 percent mass change after 166 hours'
immersion at 158 degree F; ASTM D 471.
h. Linear Dimension Change: Plus or minus 2 percent; ASTM D 1204.
2.2 AUXILIARY MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIALS
A. General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system
manufacturer for intended use, and compatible with membrane roofing.
1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard sheet flashing of same material, type,
reinforcement, thickness, and color as PVC sheet membrane.
C. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced thermoplastic polyolefin sheet
flashing, 55 mils thick, minimum, of same color as sheet membrane.
D. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard.
E. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's standard, of thickness required for application.
F. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum
bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors.
G. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard, aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel
sheet, approximately 1 inch wide by 0.05 inch thick, prepunched.
H. Water Cutoff Mastic: Manufacturer's standard butyl mastic sealant.
I. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with
corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening membrane
to substrate, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer.
J. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet
flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap
sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories.
12043 07 54 23 - 5
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN (TPO) ROOFING MECHANICALLY FASTENED
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
2.3 VAPOR RETARDER
A. Polyethylene Film: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, minimum, with maximum permeance
rating of 0.13 perm.
1. Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
2.4 ROOF INSULATION
A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by TPO
membrane roofing manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for
application, of thicknesses indicated.
B. Contractor’s Option Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type IV, .6-
lb/cu. ft. minimum density, square edged.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. DiversiFoam Products.
b. Dow Chemical Company.
c. Owens Corning.
C. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class I, Grade 3, felt or
glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces.
1. Aged R-value shall be as designated at mean temperatures indicated and as
follows: R 5.6 at 75 deg F for 1" thick insulation board.
2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread of 75.
3. Compressive Strength: 20 psi per ASTM D 1621-94 Test Method for
Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics.
4. Dimensional Stability: Less than 2.0 percent change in length, width and
thickness per ASTM D 2126-94 Test Method for Response of Rigid Cellular
Plastics to Thermal and Humid Aging.
5. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.
b. Firestone Building Products Company.
c. GAF Materials Corp.
d. Johns Manville International, Inc.
D. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4
inch per 12 inches unless otherwise indicated.
E. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes
where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.
2.5 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer
for intended use and compatibility with membrane roofing.
12043 07 54 23 - 6
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN (TPO) ROOFING MECHANICALLY FASTENED
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with
corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof
insulation and cover boards to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
C. Bead-Applied Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended bead-
applied, low-rise, one- or multicomponent urethane adhesive formulated to attach roof
insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer.
D. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/4
inch thick.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a. CertainTeed Corporation; GlasRoc Sheathing Type X.
b. Georgia-Pacific Corporation; Dens Deck.
c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond eXP Extended Exposure
Sheathing.
d. Temple-Inland, Inc; GreenGlass Exterior Sheathing.
e. USG Corporation; Securock Glass Mat Roof Board.
E. Protection Mat: Woven or nonwoven polypropylene, polyolefin, or polyester fabric, water
permeable and resistant to UV degradation, type and weight as recommended by roofing
system manufacturer for application.
2.6 WALKWAYS
A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-
textured walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch thick, and acceptable to
membrane roofing system manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the
following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:
1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and curbs are set and
braced and that roof drain bodies are securely clamped in place.
2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck
at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.
3. Verify that minimum concrete drying period recommended by roofing system
manufacturer has passed.
4. Verify that concrete substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for
capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
12043 07 54 23 - 7
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN (TPO) ROOFING MECHANICALLY FASTENED
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing
installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove
sharp projections.
B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling
or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work
is taking place or when rain is forecast.
C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water
from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when
rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on
adjoining roofing.
3.3 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION
A. Polyethylene Film: Loosely lay polyethylene-film vapor retarder in a single layer over
area to receive vapor retarder, side and end lapping each sheet a minimum of 2 inches
and 6 inches, respectively.
1. Continuously seal side and end laps with tape.
B. Completely seal vapor retarder at terminations, obstructions, and penetrations to prevent
air movement into membrane roofing system.
3.4 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed
to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.
B. Comply with membrane roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions
for installing roof insulation.
C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.
D. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall
insulation thickness is 2.7 inches or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each
succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each
direction.
E. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush
and does not restrict flow of water.
F. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints
staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding
1/4 inch with insulation.
1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.
G. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end
joints staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches in
each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck.
12043 07 54 23 - 8
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN (TPO) ROOFING MECHANICALLY FASTENED
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
1. Fasten cover boards to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of
roof.
H. Install slip sheet over cover board and immediately beneath membrane roofing.
3.5 MECHANICALLY FASTENED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION
A. Mechanically fasten membrane roofing over area to receive roofing and install according
to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
1. For in-splice attachment, install membranes roofing with long dimension
perpendicular to steel roof deck flutes.
B. Apply membrane roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
C. Spread sealant bed over deck drain flange at roof drains and securely seal membrane
roofing in place with clamping ring.
3.6 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates
according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and
allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.
C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured
sheet flashing.
D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld
side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.
E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through
termination bars.
3.7 WALKWAY INSTALLATION
A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to
substrate or adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to
roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to
inspect roofing installation on completion.
B. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where
inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
C. Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
12043 07 54 23 - 9
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN (TPO) ROOFING MECHANICALLY FASTENED
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
3.9 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construc-
tion period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roof-
ing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with
copies to Architect and Owner.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with
requirements; repair substrates; and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a
condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and accord-
ing to warranty requirements.
END OF SECTION 07 54 23
12043 07 54 23 - 10
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN (TPO) ROOFING MECHANICALLY FASTENED
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
This page intentionally left blank.
12043 07 62 00 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
SECTION 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Manufactured through-wall flashing.
2. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of
penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials.
B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall
materials, joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and
accessory.
B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
2. Detail formed flashing and trim at scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12
inches.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: For each type of coping and roof edge flashing that is SPRI ES-1
tested.
B. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing
agency.
12043 07 62 00 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing and trim, and its accessories, to include in
maintenance manuals.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal
flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a
record of successful in-service performance.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications undamaged. Protect sheet metal
flashing and trim materials and fabrications during transportation and handling.
B. Unload, store, and install sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications in a manner to
prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.
C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated
covering. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other
materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.
D. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that
might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and
trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.
E. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to
sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing
and trim installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural
movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain
watertight.
B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing
Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions
and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface tempera-
ture changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure
of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations
on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat
loss.
12043 07 62 00 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
1. Temperature Change: 120 degree F, ambient; 180 degree F, material surfaces.
D. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do not allow water infiltration
to building interior.
2.2 SHEET METALS
A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by
applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required,
with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required; with
smooth, flat surface.
1. Factory Prime Coating: Where painting after installation is required, pretreat
metal with white or light-colored, factory-applied, baked-on epoxy primer coat;
minimum dry film thickness of 0.2 mil.
2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:
a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing
not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare,
pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with
coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
4. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored
acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with
minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.
2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt;
nonperforated.
B. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 mils thick, consisting of a slip-
resistant polyethylene- or polypropylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl- or
SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; specifically designed to
withstand high metal temperatures beneath metal roofing. Provide primer according to
written recommendations of underlayment manufacturer.
1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 degree F or higher.
2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20
degree F or lower.
C. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized building paper, 3 lb/100 sq. ft.minimum.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, protective coatings, sealants,
and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim
12043 07 62 00 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufac-
tured item unless otherwise indicated.
B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets
and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and
recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.
1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.
a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic
caps or factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC
sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather
side of metal.
b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets
suitable for metal being fastened.
c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule
matching internal gutter width.
C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant
tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, non-
staining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.
D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type,
grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and
trim and remain watertight.
E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;
polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited
movement.
F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187.
G. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for
application.
2.5 MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
A. Through-Wall, Ribbed, Sheet Metal Flashing: Manufacture through-wall sheet metal
flashing for embedment in masonry, with ribs at 3-inch intervals along length of flashing
to provide integral mortar bond. Manufacture through-wall flashing with interlocking
counterflashing on exterior face, of same metal as flashing.
B. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile required, formed to provide secure
interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing
indicated.
2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown
and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions,
geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet
metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible.
12043 07 62 00 - 5
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply
with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each
application and metal.
2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning,
buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges
folded back to form hems.
4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use
exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view.
B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of
installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on
Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching
profiles.
C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions in the Work cannot be used,
form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled
with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints.
D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to
provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal
standard.
E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being
anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with
elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended
use.
G. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
2.7 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch- long, but not
exceeding 12-foot- long, sections, under copings, and at shelf angles. Fabricate
discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches beyond each side of wall
openings; and form with 2-inch- high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch thick.
B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, jamb, and similar
flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-
inch- high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick.
12043 07 62 00 - 6
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting perfor-
mance of the Work.
1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.
2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and
securely anchored.
3. Verify that air- or water-resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or
backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment, wrinkle free, using adhesive to minimize
use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle
fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.
B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle
free. Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with
temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for
installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with
end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side
edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps and edges with roller. Cover underlayment
within 14 days.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work
securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners,
protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to
complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.
1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide
uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.
2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight
performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before
fabricating sheet metal.
3. Roof edge cleats and hold-down clips shall be continuous. Space cleats not more
than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs
over fasteners.
4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of
buckling and tool marks.
5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
6. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts
pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or
12043 07 62 00 - 7
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent
separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.
1. Coat concealed side of uncoated-aluminum sheet metal flashing and trim with
bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or
cementitious construction.
2. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on
cementitious or wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet.
C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner or
intersection.
1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep,
filled with sealant concealed within joints.
2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.
D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by
fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance not less than 1-1/4 inches
for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws.
1. Galvanized or Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners.
2. Aluminum: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners.
3. Copper Use copper or stainless-steel fasteners.
4. Stainless Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners.
E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate
to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for
a tight installation.
F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction.
1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of
joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely
conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40
and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust
setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not
install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in
Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."
3.4 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture
according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installa-
tion of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors,
and louvers.
B. Through-Wall Flashing: Installation of through-wall flashing is specified in
Section 04 20 00 "Unit Masonry."
C. Reglets: Installation of reglets is specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
Section 04 20 00 "Unit Masonry."
12043 07 62 00 - 8
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
D. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, jamb, and similar
flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings.
3.5 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with
installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to
equipment support member.
3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed
tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and
within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and
trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturers written installation
instructions. On completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused
materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim
manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during
construction.
C. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated
beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 07 62 00
12043 07 71 00 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ROOF SPECIALTIES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
SECTION 07 71 00 – ROOF SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Copings.
2. Roof-edge drainage systems.
3. Flashings
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Sheet metal and trim shall withstand exposure to weather and resist
thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For roofing specialties to include in maintenance manuals.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not store roof specialties in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting,
or other surface damage. Store roof specialties away from uncured concrete and masonry.
B. Protect strippable protective covering on roof specialties from exposure to sunlight and high
humidity, except to extent necessary for the period of roof specialties installation.
1.6 WARRANTY
1. Warranty Period: Provide 2 year weather tightness warranty guarantee beginning at
substantial completion including repair and replacement of defective products and
workmanship.
12043 07 71 00 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ROOF SPECIALTIES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EXPOSED METALS
A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with
temper to suit forming operations and performance required.
1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.
2. Mill Finish: As manufactured.
B. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation.
1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other
miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.
B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to
meet performance requirements.
C. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant of type, grade, class, and use
classifications required by roofing-specialty manufacturer for each application.
D. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;
polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited
movement.
E. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
F. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.
2.3 COPINGS
A. Copings: Manufactured coping system consisting of formed-metal coping cap in section lengths
not exceeding 12 feet, concealed anchorage; corner units, end cap units, and concealed splice
plates with same finish as coping caps.
1. Corners: Factory mitered and soldered.
2. Snap-on-Coping Anchor Plates: Concealed, galvanized-steel sheet, 12 inches wide, with
integral cleats.
3. Face Leg Cleats: Concealed, continuous galvanized-steel sheet.
2.4 ROOF-EDGE FLASHINGS
A. Canted Roof-Edge Fascia: Manufactured, two-piece, roof-edge fascia consisting of metal fascia
cover in section lengths not exceeding and a continuous formed galvanized-steel sheet cant,
0.028 inch thick, minimum, with extended vertical leg terminating in a drip-edge cleat. Provide
matching corner units.
12043 07 71 00 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ROOF SPECIALTIES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
B. Roof-Edge Fascia: Manufactured, two-piece, roof-edge fascia consisting of snap-on metal
fascia cover in section lengths not exceeding 12 feet and a continuous formed- or extruded-
aluminum anchor bar with integral drip-edge cleat to engage fascia cover. Provide matching
corner units.
C. One-Piece Gravel Stops: Manufactured, one-piece, metal gravel stop in section lengths not
exceeding 12 feet, with a horizontal flange and vertical leg fascia, and concealed splice plates
of same material, finish, and shape as gravel stop. Provide matching corner units.
D. Aluminum Finish: Mill.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
E. Zinc-Coated Steel Finish:
1. Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.
2.5 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the
following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following]:
B. Gutters: Manufactured in uniform section lengths with matching corner units, ends, outlet tubes,
and other accessories. Elevate back edge at least 1 inch above front edge. Furnish flat-stock
gutter straps, gutter brackets, expansion joints, and expansion-joint covers fabricated from
same metal as gutters.
1. Gutter Profile: Style K highback according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual."
2. Gutter Supports: Manufacturer's standard supports as selected by Architect with finish
matching the gutters.
3. Gutter Accessories: Wire ball downspout strainer.
C. Downspouts: Plain rectangular complete with elbows, manufactured from the following exposed
metal. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors.
D. Parapet Scuppers: Manufactured with closure flange trim to exterior, 4-inch- wide wall flanges
to interior, and base extending 4 inches beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof. Fasten
gravel guard angles to base of scuppers.
E. Conductor Heads: Manufactured conductor heads, each with flanged back and stiffened top
edge and of dimensions and shape indicated, complete with outlet tube that nests into upper
end of downspout.
2.6 REGLETS AND COUNTERFLASHINGS
A. Counterflashings: Manufactured units of heights to overlap top edges of base flashings by 4
inches and in lengths not exceeding 12 feet designed to snap into and compress against base
flashings with joints lapped, from the following exposed metal:
12043 07 71 00 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ROOF SPECIALTIES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
2.7 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine walls, roof edges, and parapets for suitable conditions for roof specialties.
C. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Install roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof
specialties securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use
fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as
required to complete roof-specialty systems.
1. Install roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation; with limited oil-canning and
without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.
2. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder and sealant.
3. Install roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify
shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture.
4. Torch cutting of roof specialties is not permitted.
5. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from
contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with
bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
C. Seal joints with sealant as required by roofing-specialty manufacturer.
D. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. Place sealant to be completely concealed in
joint. Do not install sealants at temperatures below 40 deg F.
12043 07 71 00 - 5
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ROOF SPECIALTIES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
3.3 COPING INSTALLATION
A. Install cleats, anchor plates, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with
concealed fasteners.
B. Anchor copings to meet performance requirements.
3.4 ROOF-EDGE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Install cleats, cants, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with
concealed fasteners.
B. Anchor roof edgings with manufacturer's required devices, fasteners, and fastener spacing to
meet performance requirements.
3.5 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. General: Install components to produce a complete roof-edge drainage system according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with
installation of roof-edge drainage system.
B. Gutters: Join and seal gutter lengths. Allow for thermal expansion. Attach gutters to firmly
anchored gutter supports spaced as directed by supplier. Attach ends with rivets and seal to
make watertight. Slope to downspouts.
C. Downspouts: Join sections with manufacturer's standard telescoping joints. Provide hangers
with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls and 1 inch away from walls.
1. Provide elbows at base of downspout to direct water away from building.
2. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system if indicated.
D. Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers through parapet where indicated. Continuously support
scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered
edge strips, and under roofing membrane.
E. Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall with elevation of conductor top edge 1 inch below
discharge.
3.6 REGLET AND COUNTERFLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Coordinate installation of counterflashings with installation of base flashings.
B. Surface-Mounted Reglets: Install reglets to receive flashings where flashing without embedded
reglets is indicated on Drawings. Install at height so that inserted counterflashings overlap 4
inches over top edge of base flashings.
C. Counterflashings: Insert counterflashings into reglets or other indicated receivers; ensure that
counterflashings overlap 4 inches over top edge of base flashings. Lap counterflashing joints a
minimum of 4 inches and bed with sealant. Fit counterflashings tightly to base flashings.
12043 07 71 00 - 6
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ROOF SPECIALTIES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.
C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as roof specialties are installed.
On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces including removing unused fasteners,
metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain roof specialties in a clean
condition during construction.
D. Replace roof specialties that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by
finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 07 71 00
12043 07 72 00 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ROOF ACCESSORIES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
SECTION 07 72 00 - ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Roof curbs.
2. Equipment supports.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Roof accessories shall withstand exposure to weather and resist
thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement
due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated. Include construction details,
material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roof accessories to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base
flashing and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight,
secure, and noncorrosive installation.
B. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be
supported.
12043 07 72 00 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ROOF ACCESSORIES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL MATERIALS
A. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation.
1. Factory Prime Coating: Where field painting is indicated, apply pretreatment and
white or light-colored, factory-applied, baked-on epoxy primer coat, with a
minimum dry film thickness of 0.2 mil.
2. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored
acrylic or polyester-backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat, with a
minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, manufacturer's standard alloy for finish required, with
temper to suit forming operations and performance required.
1. Mill Finish: As manufactured.
2. Factory Prime Coating: Where field painting is indicated, apply pretreatment and
white or light-colored, factory-applied, baked-on epoxy primer coat, with a
minimum dry film thickness of 0.2 mil.
C. Aluminum Extrusions and Tubes: ASTM B 221, manufacturer's standard alloy and
temper for type of use, finished to match assembly where used, otherwise mill finished.
D. Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M
unless otherwise indicated.
E. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, round tube.
F. Galvanized-Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, round tube, hot-dip galvanized according to
ASTM A 123/A 123M.
G. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, galvanized.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and
other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.
B. Cellulosic-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, thickness as indicated.
C. Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 726, thickness as indicated.
D. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, thickness as indicated.
E. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for
aboveground use, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, containing no arsenic or
chromium, and complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick.
F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
12043 07 72 00 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ROOF ACCESSORIES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
G. Underlayment:
1. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt,
nonperforated.
2. Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil- thick polyethylene sheet complying with
ASTM D 4397.
3. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. minimum, rosin sized.
H. Fasteners: Roof accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for
application and metals being fastened. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of
material being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed
fasteners. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated or Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: Series 300
stainless steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or
ASTM F 2329.
2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.
3. Fasteners for Copper Sheet: Copper, hardware bronze, or passivated
Series 300 stainless steel.
4. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.
I. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, PVC,
or silicone or a flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork.
J. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant as
recommended by roof accessory manufacturer for installation indicated; low modulus; of
type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints and remain watertight.
K. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;
polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for expansion joints with limited movement.
L. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for
application.
2.3 ROOF CURBS
A. Roof Curbs: Internally reinforced roof-curb units capable of supporting superimposed live
and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction indicated on Drawings;
with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, integral metal cant, and
integrally formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom.
B. Size: Coordinate dimensions with roughing-in information or Shop Drawings of equip-
ment to be supported.
C. Material: Aluminum sheet, 0.090 inch thick.
1. Finish: Mill.
D. Construction:
1. Insulation: Factory insulated with 1-1/2-inch- thick glass-fiber board insulation.
2. Liner: Same material as curb, of manufacturer's standard thickness and finish.
3. Factory-installed wood nailer at top of curb, continuous around curb perimeter.
12043 07 72 00 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ROOF ACCESSORIES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
4. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom to
conform to roof profile.
5. Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 12 inches unless otherwise indicated.
6. Top Surface: Level around perimeter with roof slope accommodated by sloping
the deck-mounting flange.
7. Sloping Roofs: Where roof slope exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb with perimeter
curb height tapered to accommodate roof slope so that top surface of perimeter
curb is level. Equip unit with water diverter or cricket on side that obstructs water
flow.
2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the
range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual
locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely
anchored.
C. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without
warping, jogs in alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks.
2. Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting
indicated loads.
3. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required
to complete installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates.
4. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling,
leaking, or loosening of fasteners and seals.
B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals
from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces
with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by
manufacturer.
12043 07 72 00 - 5
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ROOF ACCESSORIES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
C. Roof Curb Installation: Install each roof curb so top surface is level.
D. Equipment Support Installation: Install equipment supports so top surfaces are level with
each other.
3.3 REPAIR AND CLEANING
A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
repair galvanizing according to ASTM A 780.
B. Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting
according to Section 09 91 00 "Painting".
C. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Clean off excess sealants.
E. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully
repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 07 72 00
12043 07 72 00 - 6
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ROOF ACCESSORIES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
This page intentionally left blank.
12043 07 84 13 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
SECTION 07 84 13 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls.
2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies.
3. Penetrations in smoke barriers.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07 84 46 "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for joints in or between fire-resistance-
rated construction, at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections, and in smoke barriers.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the
necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified
requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to
Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate
temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when
substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
B. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural
means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration
firestopping is installed according to specified requirements.
B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate
penetration firestopping.
12043 07 84 13 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. 3M Fire Protection Products.
2. Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn.
3. Hilti, Inc.
4. Johns Manville.
5. Tremco, Inc.
6. USG Corporation.
2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according
to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-
resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be
compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if
any.
B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings
determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of
0.01-inch wg.
1. Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire walls.
2. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined
per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch
wg.
1. Horizontal assemblies include floors floor/ceiling assemblies and ceiling membranes of
roof/ceiling assemblies.
2. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions
penetrated.
3. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions
penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.
D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per
UL 1479.
1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. of penetration opening at 0.30-inch wg at both
ambient and elevated temperatures.
E. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping showing no evidence of water leakage when tested
according to UL 1479.
F. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed
indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.
12043 07 84 13 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
G. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to
install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by
penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency
for firestopping indicated.
1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:
a. Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation.
b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to
prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.
c. Fire-rated form board.
d. Fillers for sealants.
2. Temporary forming materials.
3. Substrate primers.
4. Collars.
5. Steel sleeves.
2.3 FILL MATERIALS
A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete
floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial
extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a
neoprene gasket.
B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during
exposure to moisture.
C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with
intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.
D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric
sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet.
E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents,
inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.
F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil
on one side.
G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement,
fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a
nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.
H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled
with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant
additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect
pillows/bags from being easily removed.
I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand
and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
12043 07 84 13 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
J. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of
grade indicated below:
1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal
surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and sloped surfaces, unless
indicated firestopping limits use of nonsag grade for both opening conditions.
2.4 MIXING
A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping
manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required),
type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other
items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance
characteristics for application indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to
comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:
1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign
materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping.
2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces
capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose
particles remaining from cleaning operation.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that
manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not
allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining
surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be
permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove
stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation
instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.
12043 07 84 13 - 5
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during
their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths
required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming
materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping.
C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results:
1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and
penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and
penetrating items.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce
smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of
testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements.
C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection
reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and
with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers
and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that
penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If,
despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove
damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems
complying with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION 07 84 13
12043 07 84 13 - 6
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
This page intentionally left blank.
12043 07 84 46 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
SECTION 07 84 46 - FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing fire-resistive joint systems similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the
necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified
requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its fire-resistive joint system products to
Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire-resistive joint systems when ambient or substrate
temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers or when
substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
B. Install and cure fire-resistive joint systems per manufacturer's written instructions using natural
means of ventilation or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed
according to specified requirements.
B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire-resistive joint systems.
C. Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven days in advance of fire-resistive joint system
installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations.
12043 07 84 46 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
A. Where required, provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist
spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases,
and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which fire-resistive joint
systems are installed. Fire-resistive joint systems shall accommodate building movements
without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases.
B. Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Provide fire-resistive joint systems
with ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079:
1. Joints include those installed in or between fire-resistance-rated walls, floor or
floor/ceiling assemblies and roofs or roof/ceiling assemblies.
2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of construction
they will join.
3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. 3M Fire Protection Products.
b. Hilti, Inc.
c. Tremco, Inc.
d. USG Corporation.
C. Exposed Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-
developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.
D. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming
materials that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only
components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified
testing agency for systems indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire-resistive joint systems to
comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire-resistive joint system
manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers
to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
12043 07 84 46 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire-resistive joint system from
contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that
would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods
used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire-resistive joint
system's seal with substrates.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation
instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.
B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during
their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required
to achieve fire ratings indicated.
C. Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following
results:
1. Fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to achieve fire-
resistance ratings indicated.
2. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce
smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Where deficiencies are found or fire-resistive joint systems are damaged or removed due to
testing, repair or replace fire-resistive joint systems so they comply with requirements.
B. Proceed with enclosing fire-resistive joint systems with other construction only after inspection
reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers and
that do not damage materials in which joints occur.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure fire-
resistive joint systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If
damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or
deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire-
resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements.
3.6 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEM SCHEDULE
A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire
Resistance Directory"
12043 07 84 46 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
B. Floor-to-Floor, Fire-Resistive Joint Systems:
1. UL-Classified Systems: FF-D-1004
2. Assembly Rating: 1 hour, 2 Hour as indicated
3. Nominal Joint Width: Max - 4 inches
4. Movement Capabilities: Class II – 12.5 percent.
5. Product equal to 3M Company – FB-2000+.
C. Wall-to-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint Systems
1. UL-Classified Systems: WW-D-0045.
2. Assembly Rating: 1 hour, 2 hours as indicated.
3. Nominal Joint Width: Max. 2 inches.
4. Movement Capabilities: Class II -12.5 percent.
5. Product equal to 3M Company – FireDam 150+
D. Floor-to-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint Systems:
1. UL-Classified Systems: FW- S-0001.
2. Assembly Rating: 1 hour, 2 hours as indicated.
3. Nominal Joint Width: Maximum 1-1/2”.
4. Product equal to 3# Company - CP 25WB+ caulk or FB-3000 sealant.
E. Head-of-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint Systems:
1. UL-Classified Systems: HW- S-0082.
2. Assembly Rating: 1 hour, 2 hours.
3. Nominal Joint Width: ½” maximum
4. Movement Capabilities: Class II - percent.
5. Product equal to 3M Company FireDam 150+ Caulk
END OF SECTION 07 84 46
12043 07 92 00 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN JOINT SEALANTS
BID PACKAGE NO.2 12/22/2014
SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Silicone joint sealants.
2. Urethane joint sealants.
3. Latex joint sealants.
4. Acoustical joint sealants.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 04 20 00 "Unit Masonry" for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and
gaskets.
2. Section 07 84 46 "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for sealing joints in fire-resistance-rated
construction.
3. Section 08 80 00 "Glazing" for glazing sealants.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants
showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:
1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.
2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.
3. Joint-sealant formulation.
4. Joint-sealant color.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for installation of units required for this Project.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-
sealant manufacturer.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
12043 07 92 00 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN JOINT SEALANTS
BID PACKAGE NO.2 12/22/2014
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed
from joint substrates.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or
replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in
this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant
manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with
performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous
substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have
not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
C. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in
repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.
D. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation
b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones
c. Tremco Incorporated
d. 3M Company
12043 07 92 00 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN JOINT SEALANTS
BID PACKAGE NO.2 12/22/2014
B. Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant:
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Pecora Corporation.
b. Dow Corning Corporation
c. GE Advanced Materials
2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,
Class 25, for Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. BASF Building Systems.
b. Pecora Corporation.
c. Polymeric Systems, Inc.
d. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division.
e. Tremco Incorporated;
B. Single-Component, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920. Type S,
Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. BASF Building Systems
b. May National Associates, Inc
c. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division.
d. Tremco Incorporated.
C. Immersible, Single-Component, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920,
Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Uses T and I.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. BASF Building Systems.
b. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division.
c. Tremco Incorporated.
2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
12043 07 92 00 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN JOINT SEALANTS
BID PACKAGE NO.2 12/22/2014
a. BASF Building Systems.
b. Bostik, Inc
c. May National Associates, Inc
d. Pecora Corporation.
e. Tremco Incorporated.
2.5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant
complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through
perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative
assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Pecora Corporation;
b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
c. 3M Company.
2.6 JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint
substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated
by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants
and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or
harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to
promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-
sealant performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
12043 07 92 00 - 5
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN JOINT SEALANTS
BID PACKAGE NO.2 12/22/2014
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as
indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-
sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with
adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or
by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after
tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form
smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure
contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
C. Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal
construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a
continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at
perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's
written recommendations.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and
of products in which joints occur.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage
or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately
so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces subject to water
immersion.
12043 07 92 00 - 6
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN JOINT SEALANTS
BID PACKAGE NO.2 12/22/2014
1. Joint Locations:
a. Joints in pedestrian plazas.
b. Joints in swimming pool decks.
2. Urethane Joint Sealant: Immersible, single component, nonsag, traffic grade.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
b. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors windows and
louvers.
c. Other joints as indicated.
2. Silicone Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, neutral curing, Class 25.
3. Urethane Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, Class 25.
4. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
b. Control and expansion joints in stone flooring.
c. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.
d. Other joints as indicated.
2. Urethane Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, traffic grade.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.
D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
c. Tile control and expansion joints.
d. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of walls and partitions.
e. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors
windows and elevator entrances.
f. Other joints as indicated.
2. Joint Sealant: Latex.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.
E. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal
nontraffic surfaces.
1. Joint Sealant Location:
12043 07 92 00 - 7
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN JOINT SEALANTS
BID PACKAGE NO.2 12/22/2014
a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated.
2. Joint Sealant: Mildew resistant, single component, nonsag, neutral curing, Silicone.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.
F. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior acoustical joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic
surfaces
1. Joint Location:
a. Acoustical joints where indicated.
2. Joint Sealant: Acoustical.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
END OF SECTION 07 92 00
12043 07 92 00 - 8
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN JOINT SEALANTS
BID PACKAGE NO.2 12/22/2014
This page intentionally left blank.
12043 08 11 13 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
SECTION 08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes hollow-metal work.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates,
and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1. Elevations of each door type.
2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses.
3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.
4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
5. Details of each different wall opening condition.
6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.
7. Details of accessories.
8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.
9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.
C. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of
supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.
Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: For each type of hollow-metal door and frame assembly, for tests
performed by a qualified testing agency.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit
and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
12043 08 11 13 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded
to jambs and mullions.
C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum
4-inch- high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to
permit air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Amweld International, LLC.
2. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.
3. Republic Doors and Frames.
4. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single manufacturer.
2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based
on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
B. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection
ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9.
2.3 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Construct interior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials,
fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as
specified.
B. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2
1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4.
2. Doors:
a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.
b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.
c. Face: 18 gauge cold-rolled steel sheet
d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless.
e. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane,
polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core at manufacturer's
discretion.
12043 08 11 13 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
3. Frames:
a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch.
b. Construction: Knocked down, Slip-on drywall.
4. Exposed Finish: Prime.
2.4 EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Construct exterior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials,
fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as
specified.
1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4.
2. Doors:
a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.
b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches
c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 16 gauge, with minimum
A40 coating.
d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless.
e. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane,
polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core at manufacturer's
discretion.
3. Frames:
a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with
minimum A40 coating.
b. Construction: Full profile welded.
4. Exposed Finish: Prime.
2.5 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not
less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches
wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.
2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042
inch thick.
3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors.
B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, and
as follows:
1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.
2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips,
allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish
floor surface.
12043 08 11 13 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form
metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical,
fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site,
clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.
B. Hollow-Metal Doors:
1. Steel-Stiffened Door Cores: Provide minimum thickness 0.026 inch, steel vertical
stiffeners of same material as face sheets extending full-door height, with vertical webs
spaced not more than 6 inches apart. Spot weld to face sheets no more than 5 inches
o.c. Fill spaces between stiffeners with glass- or mineral-fiber insulation.
2. Fire Door Cores: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated.
3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Provide beveled or square edges at
manufacturer's discretion.
4. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit
moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.
5. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by
NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch
beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted or as required to comply with
published listing of qualified testing agency.
C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal
as frames.
1. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face
seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at
crossings and to jambs by butt welding.
2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners
unless otherwise indicated.
3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be
grouted.
4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per
anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at
bottoms of jambs.
5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c., to match coursing.,
b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c.
c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each frame.
6. Head Anchors: Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches wide and
mounted in metal-stud partitions.
7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers
as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.
a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.
b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.
D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.
12043 08 11 13 - 5
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised
hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to
SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.
1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted
door hardware.
2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation
of hollow-metal work for hardware.
F. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where
indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with mitered hairline joints.
2.7 STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer
complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate;
compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame
installation.
C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the
Work.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in
place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation.
C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
12043 08 11 13 - 6
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
D. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in
painting Sections.
END OF SECTION 08 11 13
12043 08 14 16 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN FLUSH WOOD DOORS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
SECTION 08 14 16 – FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Solid-core doors
2. Hollow-core doors.
3. Shop priming flush wood doors.
4. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for
openings.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and
weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and
maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during remainder
of construction period.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period..
1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or
replacement of defective doors.
2. Warranty Period for Hollow-Core Interior Doors: Two year(s) from date of Substantial
Completion.
12043 08 14 16 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN FLUSH WOOD DOORS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.
2. Eggers Industries.
3. Mohawk Doors; a Masonite company.
4. Oshkosh Door Company.
5. Poncraft Door Company.
6. Vancouver Door Company.
7. VT Industries, Inc.
2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL
A. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive
pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
B. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control,
based on testing according to UL 1784.
2.3 DOORS FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A. Interior Solid-Core Doors: Unit Doors and others as indicated on door schedule and drawings:
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Faces: Any closed-grain hardwood of mill option.
3. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Any closed-grain hardwood.
4. Core: Necessary to achieve identified fire rating.
5. Construction: Five or seven plies.
6. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Standard Duty.
B. Interior Hollow-Core Doors: Interior of units or as indicated on door schedule.
1. Faces: Masonite Molded Hardboard
2. Construction Grade: WDMA— Heavy Duty.
3. Cores: Kraft paper blocked construction.
4. Vertical Edges: Finger Jointed Softwood—Standard.
5. Horizontal Edges: Mill Option lumber or composite —conforming to WDMA Standards.
6. Adhesive: Type II Bond.
7. Finishes: Primed Factory Standard.
8. MDF Faces: ANSI A208.2, Grade 150 or Grade 160.
2.4 LIGHT FRAMES AND LOUVERS
A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard wood beads
unless otherwise indicated.
12043 08 14 16 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN FLUSH WOOD DOORS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces.
2. Profile: Flush rectangular beads.
3. At wood-core doors with 20-minute fire-protection ratings, provide wood beads and metal
glazing clips approved for such use.
B. Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard wood-
veneered noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use
in doors of fire-protection rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required
for opening size and fire-protection rating indicated.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of
referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply
with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA-
156.115-W, and hardware templates.
1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment
before factory machining.
2. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for
pairs of fire-rated doors.
C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.
1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with
applicable requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.
2.6 SHOP PRIMING
A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with
one coat of wood primer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors.
1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location,
and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
2. Reject doors with defects.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
12043 08 14 16 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN FLUSH WOOD DOORS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware."
B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and
referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80.
2. Install smoke- and draft-control doors according to NFPA 105.
C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
END OF SECTION 08 14 16
12043 08 3 100 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
SECTION 08 31 00 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, fire ratings, materials, individual components and profiles,
and finishes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to
access door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics according to the
following test method and that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
1. NFPA 252 or UL 10B for fire-rated access door assemblies installed vertically.
2. NFPA 288 for fire-rated access door assemblies installed horizontally.
2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated or
comparable product by one of the following:
1. Babcock-Davis. Jensen Industries; Div. of Broan-Nutone, LLC.
2. J. L. Industries, Inc.; Div. of Activar Construction Products Group.
3. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
4. Milcor Inc.
5. Nystrom, Inc.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door and frame from single source from single
manufacturer.
12043 08 3 100 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
D. Flush Access Doors with drywall bead:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: B-NW Series 304SST by Babcock Davis or equal
2. Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame. Provide manufacturer's
standard-width exposed flange, proportional to door size.
3. Locations: Wall and ceiling.
4. Door Size: 18” Square
5. Stainless-Steel Sheet for Door:
a. Finish: No. 4.
6. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door.
7. Hinges: piano.
8. Hardware: screwdriver activated cam lock
E. Fire-Rated, Uninsulated Flush Access Doors
1. Basis-of-Design Product: B-UW Series by Babcock Davis or equal.
2. Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame, uninsulated. Provide self-
latching door with automatic closer and interior latch release. Provide manufacturer's
standard-width exposed flange, proportional to door size.
3. Locations: Wall and ceiling.
4. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction.
5. Stainless-Steel Sheet for Door: [
a. Finish: No. 4.
6. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door.
7. Hinges: Piano
8. Hardware: screwdriver activated cam lock
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for
installation.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Stainless-Steel Finishes:
1. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
2. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross
scratches.
a. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.
b. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded
foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
c. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.
3. Bright, Cold-Rolled, Unpolished Finish: No. 2B.
12043 08 3 100 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
B. Aluminum Finishes:
1. Mill finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.
B. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.
B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
END OF SECTION 08 31 13
12043 08 3 100 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
This page intentionally left blank.
12043 08 36 13 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SECTIONAL DOORS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
SECTION 08 36 13 - SECTIONAL DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes manually operated sectional doors.
B. Operating Hardware, tracks, and support.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Sectional doors shall meet performance requirements specified without
failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction
and without requiring temporary installation of reinforcing components.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of sectional door and accessory.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's finish charts showing full range of colors and
textures available for units with factory-applied finishes.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For sectional doors to include in maintenance manuals.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of sectional doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
b. Faulty operation of hardware.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering and use; rust through.
d. Delamination of exterior or interior facing materials.
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
12043 08 36 13 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SECTIONAL DOORS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DOOR ASSEMBLY
A. Steel Sectional Door: Sectional door formed with hinged sections.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Raynor.
b. Rite-Hite Corporation.
c. Wayne-Dalton Corp
d. Overhead Door.
2. Panel Thickness: 1”
3. R-Value: 9.3.
4. Steel Sections: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet with zinc coating
5. Insulation: Foamed in place polyurethane
6. Interior Facing Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet Interior Facing Material:
7. Track Configuration: Standard-lift track.
8. Weatherseals: Fitted to bottom and top and around entire perimeter of door.
9. Roller-Tire Material: Manufacturer's standard.
10. Locking Devices: Equip door with slide bolt for padlock
11. Counterbalance Type: Torsion spring.
12. Manual Door Operator: Push-up operation.
13. Door Finish:
a. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coated Finish: Color and gloss as selected by Architect
from manufacturer's full range.
b. Factory Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard color.
c. Finish of Interior Facing Material: Match finish of exterior section face.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install sectional doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors,
inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and
as specified.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of
warp, twist, or distortion.
12043 08 36 13 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SECTIONAL DOORS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer.
C. Adjust doors and seals to provide weathertight fit around entire perimeter.
D. Touch-up Painting: Immediately after welding galvanized materials, clean welds and abraded
galvanized surfaces and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 08 36 13
12043 08 36 13 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SECTIONAL DOORS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
This page intentionally left blank.
12043 08 41 13 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
SECTION 08 41 13 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Exterior manual-swing entrance doors and door-frame units.
2. Interior manual-swing entrance doors and door-frame units.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size
details, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing
fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.
Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to
ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed entrances to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and
approved by manufacturer.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer and installer agree to repair or replace components of
aluminum-framed entrances that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
12043 08 41 13 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by
testing of aluminum-framed entrances representing those indicated for this Project without
failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the following]
[provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable
product by one of the following:
1. Kawneer North America.
2. TRACO.
3. Tubelite.
4. United States Aluminum.
2.3 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS
A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.
1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch (44.5-mm) overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch-
(3.2-mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten
corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that
incorporate concealed tie rods.
2. Door Design: Medium stile; 3-1/2-inch (88.9-mm) nominal width.
3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets.
a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.
B. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum, minimum 0.125 inch (3.2 mm)
thick and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1. Nominal Size: 1-3/4 by 4-1/2 inches (45 by 115 mm).
C. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not
integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.
D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with
nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
E. Materials:
1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
12043 08 41 13 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M.
d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
2. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer
complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation
and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in
SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.
a. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
b. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
c. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE
A. Entrance Door Hardware: Hardware not specified in this Section is specified in
Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware."
B. General: Provide entrance door hardware for each entrance door to comply with requirements
in this Section.
1. Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and
named manufacturers' products.
2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of
operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated.
3. Opening-Force Requirements:
a. Egress Doors: Not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch and not more than
30 lbf (133 N) to set the door in motion.
b. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N) to fully open door.
C. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive
qualities of each type of entrance door hardware are indicated in "Entrance Door Hardware
Sets" Article. Products are identified by using entrance door hardware designations as follows:
1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for
each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements.
Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article.
2. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these standards and
requirements for description, quality, and function.
D. Pivot Hinges: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1.
E. Butt Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, radius corner.
1. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove
in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while entrance door is closed.
2. Exterior Hinges: Nonferrous.
3. Quantities:
a. For doors up to 87 inches (2210 mm) high, provide three hinges per leaf.
b. For doors more than 87 and up to 120 inches (2210 and up to 3048 mm) high,
provide four hinges per leaf.
12043 08 41 13 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
F. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.
G. Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1.
H. Panic Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1, listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing
according to UL 305.
I. Cylinders: As specified in Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware."
J. Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for
aluminum framing.
K. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6.
L. Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1, with accessories required for a complete installation, sized as
required by door size, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use; adjustable to
comply with field conditions and requirements for opening force.
M. Surface-Mounted Holders: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.
N. Door Stops: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1, floor or wall mounted, as appropriate for door location
indicated, with integral rubber bumper.
O. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.
1. Compression Type: Made of ASTM D 2000, molded neoprene, or ASTM D 2287, molded
PVC.
P. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed
fasteners on mounting strip.
Q. Silencers: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.
R. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21, raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 1:2, with
maximum height of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).
S. Finger Guards: Manufacturer's standard collapsible neoprene or PVC gasket anchored to
frame hinge-jamb at center-pivoted doors.
2.5 GLAZING
A. Glazing: Comply with Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black,
resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.
C. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,
nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
12043 08 41 13 - 5
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
B. Concealed Flashing: [Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding
flashing compatible with adjacent materials] [Dead-soft, 0.018-inch- (0.457-mm-) thick stainless
steel, ASTM A 240/A 240M of type recommended by manufacturer].
C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12
requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per
coat.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of
finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or
grinding.
C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:
1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to
maintain required glazing edge clearances.
5. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest
extent possible.
D. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and
for installing entrance door hardware.
1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.
2. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install
three silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames
for pairs of doors.
E. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.
1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable
strip and mortised into door edge.
2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.
F. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest
extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying
finishes.
G. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop
Drawings.
2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2604
and containing not less than percent resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply
coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written
instructions.
12043 08 41 13 - 6
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare surfaces that are in contact with structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's
written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not
limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Do not install damaged components.
3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.
6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal Protection:
1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose
or installing nonconductive spacers.
2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by
painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 07 92 00
"Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.
D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.
E. Install glazing as specified in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
F. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.
1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather
stripping.
2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door
hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using
concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
12043 08 41 13 - 7
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
3.4 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Entrance Door Hardware:
1. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance,
and removal and replacement of entrance door hardware.
END OF SECTION 08 41 13
12043 08 41 13 - 8
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
This page intentionally left blank.
12043 SECTION 085313 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN VINYL WINDOWS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
SECTION 08 53 13 - VINYL WINDOWS AND DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes
1. Vinyl-framed windows.
2. Fixed Windows
3. Patio Doors
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, glazing and fabrication methods,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, and finishes for vinyl
windows.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware, accessories, insect screens,
operational clearances, and details of installation, including anchor, flashing, and sealant
installation.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and Installer.
B. Product Test Reports: For each type of vinyl window, for tests performed by a qualified testing
agency.
C. Field quality-control reports.
D. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's warranties.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating vinyl windows that meet or
exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by test
reports and calculations.
B. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to vinyl window manufacturer for installation of
units required for this Project.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace vinyl windows that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
12043 SECTION 085313 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN VINYL WINDOWS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
1. Warranty Period:
a. Window: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
b. Glazing Units: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
c. Door: 10 years for date of Substantial Completion
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or comparable
product by one of the following:
1. CertainTeed Corporation.
2. Jeld-Wen, Inc.
3. Pella Corporation.
4. Simonton Windows..
5. Stormshield
C. Source Limitations: Obtain vinyl windows from single source from single manufacturer.
2.2 VINYL WINDOWS
A. Operating Types: Provide the following operating types in locations indicated on Drawings:
1. Single hung equal to Brickmould 300 by Simonton Windows
2. Horizontal sliding doors equal to Brickmould 300 Patio Door by Simonton Windows
3. Fixed equal to Brickmould 300 by Simonton Windows
B. Frames and Sashes: Impact-resistant, UV-stabilized PVC complying with
AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.
1. Finish: Integral color, white.
2. Gypsum Board Returns: Provide at interior face of frame.
C. Glass: Clear annealed glass, ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3.
1. Kind: Fully tempered where required by building code.
D. Insulating-Glass Units: ASTM E 2190.
1. Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3.
a. Tint: Clear..
12043 SECTION 085313 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN VINYL WINDOWS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
2. Lites: Two.
3. Low-E Coating
4. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces
weathertight seal.
E. Hardware, General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum,
stainless steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion-resistant material
compatible with adjacent materials; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely
lock windows, and sized to accommodate sash weight and dimensions.
F. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash unless
otherwise indicated.
G. Fasteners: Noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and
other components.
1. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners to the greatest extent possible. For
application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish hardware being fastened.
2.3 VINYL DOORS
A. Operating Types: Provide the following operating types in locations indicated on Drawings:
1. Inswing
B. Frames and Sashes: Impact-resistant, UV-stabilized PVC complying with
AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.
1. Finish: Integral color, white.
2. Gypsum Board Returns: Provide at interior face of frame.
C. Glass: Clear annealed glass, ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3.
1. Kind: Fully tempered where required by building code.
D. Insulating-Glass Units: ASTM E 2190.
1. Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3.
a. Tint: Clear..
2. Lites: Two.
3. Low-E Coating
4. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces
weathertight seal.
E. Hardware, General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum,
stainless steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion-resistant material
compatible with adjacent materials; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely
lock windows, and sized to accommodate sash weight and dimensions.
F. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash unless
otherwise indicated.
12043 SECTION 085313 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN VINYL WINDOWS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
G. Fasteners: Noncorrosive and compatible with door members, trim, hardware, anchors, and
other components.
1. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners to the greatest extent possible. For
application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish hardware being fastened.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Dividers: Provide divider simulated divided lites in designs indicated for each sash lite.
1. Quantity and Type: Two permanently attached to the interior and exterior lites.
2. Material: Manufacturer's standard.
3. Pattern: As indicated on Drawings.
4. Profile: Sculpted.
5. Color: White.
2.5 INSECT SCREENS
A. General: Fabricate insect screens to fully integrate with window frame. Provide screen for each
operable exterior sash. Screen wickets are not permitted.
1. Type and Location: Half, outside for single-hung sashes.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate vinyl windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling
components and anchoring windows.
B. Glaze vinyl windows in the factory.
C. Weather strip each operable sash to provide weathertight installation.
D. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates, compatible with window units, complete with
anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances
and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections.
Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design wind loads of window units.
Provide manufacturer's standard finish to match window units.
E. Hardware: Mount hardware through double walls of vinyl extrusions or provide corrosion-
resistant reinforcement.
F. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to
greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and
installation. Allow for scribing, trimming, and fitting at Project site.
12043 SECTION 085313 - 5
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN VINYL WINDOWS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
B. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational clearances.
C. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in
components to ensure weathertight window installation.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories,
and other components. For installation procedures and requirements not addressed in
manufacturer's written instructions, comply with installation requirements in ASTM E 2112.
3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A. Adjust operating sashes and hardware for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for
smooth operation and weathertight closure.
B. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Remove excess sealants,
glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.
1. Keep protective films and coverings in place until final cleaning.
C. Remove and replace sashes if glass has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged
during construction period.
D. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from
construction operations. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove
contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 08 53 13
12043 SECTION 085313 - 6
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN VINYL WINDOWS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
12043 08 71 00 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN DOOR HARDWARE
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Mechanical door hardware for the following:
a. Swinging doors.
2. Cylinders for door hardware specified in other Sections.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction and installation details,
material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Other Action Submittals:
1. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing
fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and
diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work
to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
a. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers
as in the Contract Documents.
2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing Owner's
final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key
set to unique door designations that are coordinated with the Contract Documents.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved
by product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the
course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and
keying.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from a single manufacturer.
C. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated door assemblies are indicated, provide door
hardware rated for use in assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive
pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch.
Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.
12043 08 71 00 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN DOOR HARDWARE
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
E. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with
the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility
Guidelines ICC/ANSI A117.1, and HUD's "Fair Housing Accessibility Guidelines".
1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the
wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N).
2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:
a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to
door.
b. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more
than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high.
4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door
will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured
to the leading edge of the door.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to
Project site.
B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door hardware
schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each
item or package.
C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner.
D. Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of floor-recessed door hardware with floor construction. Cast
anchoring inserts into concrete. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are
specified elsewhere.
B. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory
prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made
for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
C. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's
security consultant.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
12043 08 71 00 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN DOOR HARDWARE
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.
b. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering and use.
2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise
indicated.
a. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
b. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and
replacement of door hardware.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A. Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled on Drawings to comply with requirements in
this Section.
1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated.
B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive
qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule"
Article. Products are identified by descriptive titles corresponding to requirements specified in
Part 2.
2.2 HINGES
A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Provide template-produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow-metal
doors and hollow-metal frames.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Hager Companies.
b. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
c. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works.
2.3 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES
A. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule.
B. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors.
12043 08 71 00 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN DOOR HARDWARE
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
C. Lock Trim:
1. Description: As indicated on Drawings.
D. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with
requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended
to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch.
E. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2; Grade 1; Series 4000.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
b. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
c. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
d. Yale Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
F. Push-Pull Latches: Bored, BHMA A156.2; Series 4000; Grade; with paddle handles that retract
latchbolt; capable of being mounted vertically or horizontally.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
b. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
c. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
d. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
e. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
2.4 SURFACE BOLTS
A. Surface Bolts: BHMA A156.16.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated.
b. Door Controls International, Inc.
c. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
2.5 MANUAL FLUSH BOLTS
A. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16; minimum 3/4-inch (19-mm) throw; designed for mortising
into door edge.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
12043 08 71 00 - 5
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN DOOR HARDWARE
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
b. Door Controls International, Inc.
c. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
B. Manual-Extension Flush Bolts: Grade 2, fabricated from extruded brass or aluminum, with 12-
inch (305-mm) rod actuated by flat lever. Provide with matching strike.
2.6 EXIT DEVICES AND AUXILIARY ITEMS
A. Exit Devices and Auxiliary Items: BHMA A156.3.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
b. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America.
c. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
d. Von Duprin; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
e. Yale Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
B. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305.
C. Fire Exit Devices: Devices complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection,
based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252.
D. Rim Exit Devices: Grade 1.
1. Type: See hardware schedule
E. Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar.
2.7 LOCK CYLINDERS
A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Best Access Systems; Div. of Stanley Security Solutions, Inc.
b. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
c. Falcon Lock; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
d. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
e. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
f. Yale Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
B. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5; Grade 1; permanent cores that are removable; face
finished to match lockset.
1. Number of Pins: Five.
12043 08 71 00 - 6
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN DOOR HARDWARE
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
2. Type: Bored-lock type.
C. Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of construction
keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys.
D. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores.
Provide 10 construction master keys.
2.8 KEYING
A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, Appendix A.
Incorporate decisions made in keying conference.
B. Keys: Nickel silver.
1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include
the following notation:
a. Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE."
2. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the following:
a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three.
b. Master Keys: Five.
c. Grand Master Keys: Five.
d. Great-Grand Master Keys: Five.
2.9 OPERATING TRIM
A. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated.
b. Hager Companies.
c. Hiawatha, Inc.
d. IVES Hardware; An Ingersoll-Rand Company.
2.10 ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS
A. Coordinators: BHMA A156.3; consisting of active-leaf, hold-open lever and inactive-leaf release
trigger; fabricated from steel with nylon-coated strike plates; with built-in, adjustable safety
release.
B. Carry-Open Bars: BHMA A156.3; prevent the inactive leaf from opening before the active leaf;
provide polished brass or bronze carry-open bars with strike plate for inactive leaves of pairs of
doors unless automatic or self-latching bolts are used.
C. Flat Overlapping Astragals: BHMA A156.22; flat primed steel metal bar, surface mounted on
face of door with screws; minimum 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick by 2 inches (51 mm) wide by full
height of door.
12043 08 71 00 - 7
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN DOOR HARDWARE
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
D. Rigid, Housed Astragals: BHMA A156.22; gasket material held in place by metal housing;
fastened to face of door with screws.
1. Gasket Material: Neoprene.
2. Housing Material: Copper alloy (brass or bronze).
E. Overlapping-with-Gasket Astragals: BHMA A156.22; T-shaped metal, surface mounted on
edge of door with screws; with integral gasket and base metal.
2.11 SURFACE CLOSERS
A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and
latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with
manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door,
exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers,
adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
b. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America.
c. Dor-O-Matic; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
d. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
e. Yale Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
2.12 MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Wall- and Floor-Mounted Stops: BHMA A156.16; polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated.
b. Hager Companies.
c. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
d. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works.
2.13 DOOR GASKETING
A. Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; air leakage not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot (0.000774 cu. m/s
per m) of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to
ASTM E 283; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available
from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Hager Companies.
12043 08 71 00 - 8
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN DOOR HARDWARE
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
b. National Guard Products.
c. Pemko Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
2.14 THRESHOLDS
A. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Hager Companies.
b. National Guard Products.
c. Pemko Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
d. Reese Enterprises, Inc.
2.15 METAL PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS
A. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; with manufacturer's standard machine or self-
tapping screw fasteners.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Baldwin Hardware Corporation.
b. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated.
c. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
2.16 AUXILIARY DOOR HARDWARE
A. Auxiliary Hardware: BHMA A156.16.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Baldwin Hardware Corporation.
b. Hager Companies.
c. Rockwood Manufacturing Company.
d. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works.
B. Fire-Rated Door Viewers: Solid brass with optical glass lenses; listed and labeled for use in
fire-rated door assemblies; adjustable to door thickness, and permitting 1-way observation with
minimum 120-degree viewing angle.
C. Silencers for Wood Door Frames: Grade 1; neoprene or rubber; minimum 5/8 by 3/4 inch (16
by 19 mm); fabricated for drilled-in application to frame.
D. Silencers for Metal Door Frames: Grade 1; neoprene or rubber; minimum diameter 1/2 inch (13
mm); fabricated for drilled-in application to frame.
12043 08 71 00 - 9
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN DOOR HARDWARE
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
2.17 FABRICATION
A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared
for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially
recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not
permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door
hardware, unless otherwise indicated.
2.18 FINISHES
A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor
construction, and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections
before electrified door hardware installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames
according to ANSI/SDI A250.6.
B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations
for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors."
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where
cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be
painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface
protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have
been completed on substrates involved.
1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment
substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.
2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space
fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
B. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than
the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30
inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of
support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.
12043 08 71 00 - 10
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN DOOR HARDWARE
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
C. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction
period.
D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant
complying with requirements specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."
E. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door
hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic.
F. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.
G. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.
H. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to
ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to
operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating
and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately six months after date of Substantial Completion,
Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust each item of door
hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to ensure function of doors, door
hardware, and electrified door hardware.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END SECTION 08 71 00
12043 08 80 00 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN GLAZING
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in
other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:
1. Glass for hollow metal and wood doors that are not pre-glazed.
2. Storefront framing.
3. Glazed entrances.
4. Interior borrowed lites.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction and installation details,
material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to
glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or
other causes.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when
glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are
outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 degree F.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in
which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within
specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from
normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass
contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other
indications of deterioration in coating.
12043 08 80 00 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN GLAZING
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.
B. Clear Tempered: ASTM C1036, Type 1, Class 1.
2.2 INSULATING GLASS
A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by
a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other
requirements specified.
2.3 GLAZING GASKETS
A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to
maintain watertight seal.
2.4 GLAZING SEALANTS
A. General:
1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with
other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units,
and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at
time of installation.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application
indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or
minus 5.
D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass
manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side
walking).
12043 08 80 00 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN GLAZING
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and
density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant
performance.
G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that
listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire-
protection rating indicated.
2.6 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face
clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product
manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance
requirements.
B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges
with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.
C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.
2.7 INSULATING-GLASS TYPES
A. Glass Type: Low-e-coated, clear insulating glass.
1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch.
2. Outdoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass.
3. Indoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass.
4. Low-E Coating
5. Provide safety glazing labeling.
2.8 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING TYPES
A. Glass Type: Fire -rated glazing to meet requirements of UL assembly in which it resides.
1. Provide safety glazing labeling.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the
following:
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and
offsets at corners.
2. Presence and functioning of weep systems.
3. Minimum required face and edge clearances.
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
12043 08 80 00 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN GLAZING
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.
Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so
that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave
visible marks in the completed work.
3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and
other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
referenced glazing publications.
B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to
provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant
thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.
C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass
from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge
damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair
performance and appearance.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed
streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove
nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with
glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at
frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum,
alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from
natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before
date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as
recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 08 80 00
12043 08 91 19 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN FIXED LOUVERS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
SECTION 08 91 19 - FIXED LOUVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fixed, extruded-aluminum louvers.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing.
C. Samples: For each type of metal finish required.
1.3 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before
fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers from single source from a single manufacturer where
indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish.
2.2 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS
A. Horizontal, Drainable-Blade Louver
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide louvers as
shown on drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Air Flow Company, Inc.
b. Airolite Company, LLC (The).
c. Cesco Products; a divsion of MESTEK, Inc.
d. Construction Specialties, Inc.
e. Dowco Products Group.
12043 08 91 19 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN FIXED LOUVERS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
f. Ruskin Company.
3. Louver Depth: 4 inches.
2.3 BLANK-OFF PANELS
A. Uninsulated, Blank-Off Panels: Metal sheet attached to back of louver.
1. Aluminum sheet for aluminum louvers, not less than 0.050-inch nominal thickness.
2. Panel Finish: Same finish applied to louvers.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or as
otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Factory assemble louvers to minimize field splicing and assembly.
B. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.
2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Finish louvers after assembly.
B. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of
1.5 mils. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion
coating, and applying and baking finish.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.
12043 08 91 19 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN FIXED LOUVERS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean exposed louver surfaces that are not protected by temporary covering, to remove
fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate during construction
period.
B. Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of
corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove
damaged units and replace with new units.
END OF SECTION 08 91 19
12043 09 21 16 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
SECTION 09 21 16 - GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction and installation
details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and
finishes.
1.3 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Gypsum board shaft wall assemblies.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather,
condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage.
Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or with gypsum
board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited
to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide
materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to
ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
12043 09 21 16 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
2.2 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated or required by governing regulations, provide the
manufacturer's standard materials specified in his published product literature for the
system and application required.
B. Deflection Limit: L/240.
C. Fire-Resistance Rating: As indicated.
D. Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive members, corner and end members,
and fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.
1. Depth: As indicated.
2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated.
E. Runner Tracks: Manufacturer's standard J-profile track with manufacturer's standard
long-leg length, but at least 2 inches long and matching studs in depth.
F. Firestop Tracks: Provide firestop track at head of shaft wall on each floor level.
2.3 PANEL PRODUCTS
A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in
each area and that correspond with support system indicated.
B. Gypsum Shaftliner Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; manufacturer's proprietary
fire-resistive liner panels with paper faces.
1. Thickness: 1 inch.
2. Long Edges: Double bevel.
C. Gypsum Board: As specified in Division 09 Section 09 29 00, "Gypsum Board."
2.4 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING
A. Steel Framing Members: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Protective Coating: Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 unless otherwise indicated.
B. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and
contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-
rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to
accommodate depth of studs.
2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with manufacturer's written
recommendations.
12043 09 21 16 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
B. Trim Accessories: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints of material and shapes as
specified in Division 09 Section 09 29 00, "Gypsum Board" that comply with gypsum
board shaft wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations for application indi-
cated.
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.
D. Track Fasteners: Power-driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand
loading conditions imposed on shaft wall assemblies without exceeding allowable design
stress of track, fasteners, or structural substrates in which anchors are embedded.
1. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as
determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified testing
agency.
2. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application
indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain,
without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing
according to ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board shaft wall assemblies attach or abut, with
Installer present, including hollow-metal frames, elevator hoistway door frames, cast-in
anchors, and structural framing. Examine for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or
mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install gypsum board shaft wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fire-
resistance-rated assemblies indicated, manufacturer's written installation instructions,
and ASTM C 754 other than stud-spacing requirements.
B. Do not bridge building expansion joints with shaft wall assemblies; frame both sides of
expansion joints with furring and other support.
C. Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaft wall assemblies around openings
and as required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures,
equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings, wall-mounted door stops, and similar items
that cannot be supported directly by shaft wall assembly framing.
D. Penetrations: At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire-resistance rating of shaft wall
assembly by installing supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and
fire protection behind boxes containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons, elevator floor
indicators, and similar items.
12043 09 21 16 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
E. Isolate perimeter of gypsum panels from building structure to prevent cracking of panels,
while maintaining continuity of fire-rated construction.
F. Firestop Tracks: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated
assembly indicated.
G. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations
approved by Architect while maintaining fire-resistance rating of gypsum board shaft wall
assemblies.
H. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more
than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited
to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 09 21 16
12043 09 29 00 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN GYPSUM BOARD
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
SECTION 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior gypsum board.
2. Tile backing panels.
3. Textured finishes
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction and installation details,
material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather,
condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack
panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.
1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold
damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an
independent testing agency.
12043 09 29 00 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN GYPSUM BOARD
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction
identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according
to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and
that correspond with support system indicated.
2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1. CertainTeed Corporation
2. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
3. USG Corporation.
4. Thickness: 5/8” inch.
5. Long Edges: Tapered.
B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
C. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1. Thickness: 5/8” inch.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325, with manufacturer's
standard edges.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; FiberCement BackerBoard.
b. James Hardie Building Products, Inc.; Hardiebacker.
c. National Gypsum Company, Permabase Cement Board.
d. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.
2. Thickness: 1/2 inch.
3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.
B. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, with manufacturer's
standard edges.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
12043 09 29 00 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN GYPSUM BOARD
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
a. CertainTeed Corp.
b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
c. USG Corporation.
2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.
2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, or paper-faced
galvanized steel sheet.
2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead.
b. Bullnose bead.
c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.
f. Expansion (control) joint.
g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.
2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.
2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible
with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:
1. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.
2. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping compound and
setting-type, sandable topping compound.
2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum
panels to continuous substrate.
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.
12043 09 29 00 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN GYPSUM BOARD
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by
panel manufacturer.
D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag
wool, or rock wool.
1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.
E. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant
complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through
perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative
assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant.
b. Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC.
c. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 07 21 00 "Thermal Insulation."
G. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 07 21 00 "Thermal Insulation."
2.8 TEXTURED FINISHES
A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer.
B. Finish: Orange Peel finish.
C. Location: All corridors, units, and public areas (excluding amenities and associated spaces)
ceilings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
12043 09 29 00 - 5
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN GYPSUM BOARD
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid
abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent
panels not less than one framing member.
C. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner
construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber,
including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or provide control
joints to counteract wood shrinkage.
D. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings
and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both
faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with
manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking
paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
E. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily
installed after panels have been installed on one side.
3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Install interior gypsum board in the locations as identified in the Wall Types on the Drawings
B. Single-Layer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest
extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels to minimize end joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses
of panels.
b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end
joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.
4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
C. Multilayer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on
walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to
framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches minimum,
from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-
rated assembly.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers
vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring
member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer
joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger
joints on opposite sides of partitions.
3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer
either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical
joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring
members.
12043 09 29 00 - 6
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN GYPSUM BOARD
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Comply with manufacturer's written installation
instructions and install at locations indicated to receive tile. Install with 1/4-inch gap where
panels abut other construction or penetrations.
B. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at showers, tubs, and where indicated.
3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Control Joints: Install control joints [at locations indicated on Drawings] [according to
ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect].
3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces
for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not
intended to receive tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to
ASTM C 840:
1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.
2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile.
3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.
E. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.7 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other
surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth.
B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a
uniform texture free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application
patterns.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other
non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall
application.
12043 09 29 00 - 7
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN GYPSUM BOARD
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
END OF SECTION 09 29 00
12043 09 29 00 - 8
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN GYPSUM BOARD
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
This page intentionally left blank.
12043 09 30 00 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN TILING
BID PACKAGE NO.2 12/22/2014
SECTION 09 30 00 - TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Accent tile
2. Porcelain Tile
3. Tile Base
4. Crack isolation membrane.
5. Tile backing panels.
6. Metal edge strips.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples for Verification:
1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and
that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount
installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.
2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type,
composition, and color indicated.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels
intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.
B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination can be avoided.
12043 09 30 00 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN TILING
BID PACKAGE NO.2 12/22/2014
D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.
E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated
surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding
surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in
referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02,
ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCA
installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified.
2.2 TILE PRODUCTS
A. Provide products as indicated on the Finish Schedule on the Drawings:
2.3 TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C 1325, in maximum lengths available to
minimize end-to-end butt joints.
1. Thickness: 1/2 inch.
2.4 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE
A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.12 for performance
and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement
and accessories recommended by manufacturer.
2.5 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4.
2.6 GROUT MATERIALS
A. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, composed of white or gray cement and white or
colored aggregate as required to produce color indicated.
12043 09 30 00 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN TILING
BID PACKAGE NO.2 12/22/2014
2.7 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
A. General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories that comply
with the manufacturer’s requirements and with the applicable requirements in Section 07 92 00
"Joint Sealants."
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, designed
specifically for flooring applications;
1. Stainless steel exposed-edge material.
2.9 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout
manufacturers' written instructions.
B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.
C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and
other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance
characteristics for installations indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of installed tile.
1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are
incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances
that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by
ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar comply with
surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives
or thin-set mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by
tile-setting material manufacturer.
12043 09 30 00 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN TILING
BID PACKAGE NO.2 12/22/2014
3.3 TILE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods
specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series
"Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods,
specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.
B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete
covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at
obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring
visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight
aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so
plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges.
E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center
tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize
the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise
indicated.
F. Metal Edge Strips: Install [at locations indicated] [where exposed edge of tile flooring meets
carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile] [where exposed edge of tile
flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with or below top of tile and no
threshold is indicated].
G. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to grout joints according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written
instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and
sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.
3.4 TILE BACKING PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Install cementitious backer units and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's
written instructions for type of application indicated.
3.5 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written
instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.
B. Do not install tile or setting materials over crack isolation membrane until membrane has cured.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are
free of foreign matter.
1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible.
2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written
instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners
12043 09 30 00 - 5
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN TILING
BID PACKAGE NO.2 12/22/2014
recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners
are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect
metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean
water before and after cleaning.
B. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to
prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of
neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.
C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is
completed.
D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from
tile surfaces.
END OF SECTION 09 30 00
12043 09 30 00 - 6
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN TILING
BID PACKAGE NO.2 12/22/2014
This page intentionally left blank.
12043 09 65 16 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN RESILIENT FLOORING AND ACCESSORIES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
SECTION 09 65 16 - RESILIENT FLOORING AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes vinyl sheet flooring.
B. Vinyl Plank Flooring.
C. Laminate Flooring
D. Resilient Base
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch sections
of each different color and pattern of resilient sheet flooring required.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For each type of resilient sheet flooring to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Resilient Sheet Flooring: Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or
fraction thereof, in roll form and in full roll width for each type, color, and pattern of
flooring installed.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are
competent in techniques required by manufacturer for resilient sheet flooring installation and
seaming method indicated.
1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by
resilient sheet flooring manufacturer for installation techniques required.
2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
12043 09 65 16 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN RESILIENT FLOORING AND ACCESSORIES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store resilient sheet flooring and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather,
with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less
than 50 degree F or more than 90 degree F. Store rolls upright.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range
recommended by manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient sheet flooring, as determined by testing
identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
2.2 VINYL SHEET FLOORING SV1
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product as shown on drawings.
B. Use Seamless-Installation Method
2.3 VINYL PLANK FLOORING
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
1. Refer to drawings for material specification
2.4 LAMINATE FLOORING
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
1. Refer to drawings for material specifications
2.5 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers to suit
resilient sheet flooring and substrate conditions indicated.
B. Seamless-Installation Accessories:
1. Chemical-Bonding Compound: Manufacturer's product for chemically bonding seams.
12043 09 65 16 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN RESILIENT FLOORING AND ACCESSORIES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified
in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and
foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient sheet flooring.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to resilient sheet flooring manufacturer's written instructions to
ensure adhesion of resilient sheet flooring.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives
and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by
resilient sheet flooring manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by resilient sheet flooring
manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on
pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing.
4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according
to resilient sheet flooring manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent
than the following:
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D. Do not install resilient sheet flooring until it is the same temperature as the space where it is to
be installed.
1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move flooring and installation materials into
spaces where they will be installed.
E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient
sheet flooring.
3.3 RESILIENT FLOORING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient sheet flooring.
B. Extend resilient sheet flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
C. Adhere resilient sheet flooring to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate
to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
12043 09 65 16 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN RESILIENT FLOORING AND ACCESSORIES
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
D. Seamless Installation:
1. Chemically Bonded Seams: Bond seams with chemical-bonding compound to
permanently fuse sections into a seamless flooring. Prepare seams and apply compound
to produce tightly fitted seams without gaps, overlays, or excess bonding compound on
flooring surfaces.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient sheet
flooring.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient sheet flooring
installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C. Protect resilient sheet flooring from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from
construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of
construction period.
D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from flooring surfaces before applying
liquid floor polish.
E. Cover resilient sheet flooring until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09 65 16
12043 09 68 13 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SHEET CARPETING
BID PACKAGE NO.2 12/22/2014
SECTION 09 68 13 - CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Carpet.
2. Carpet tile
3. Carpet cushion.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following, including installation recommendations for each type of
substrate:
1. Carpet: For each type indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical
characteristics, durability, and fade resistance.
2. Carpet Cushion: For each type indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on
physical characteristics and durability.
B. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label
each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation
indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
C. Product Schedule: For carpet and carpet cushion. Use same designations indicated on
Drawings.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B. Product Test Reports: For carpet and carpet cushion, for tests performed by a qualified testing
agency.
C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:
1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and
procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.
2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet and
carpet cushion.
12043 09 68 13 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SHEET CARPETING
BID PACKAGE NO.2 12/22/2014
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Carpet: Full-width rolls equal to 2 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but
not less than 10 sq. yd..
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Ratings: Where indicated, provide carpet and carpet cushion identical to
those of assemblies tested for fire response per NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with CRI 104.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations.
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet and carpet cushion until spaces are
enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature
and humidity conditions are maintained at occupancy levels during the remainder of the
construction period.
C. Do not install carpet and carpet cushion over concrete slabs until slabs have cured, are
sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, and have pH range recommended by carpet
manufacturer.
1.9 WARRANTY
1. Carpets to have manufacturer’s standard warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CARPET
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Carpets and carpet tile are scheduled on drawings by Vendor, pattern name, finish, size
and color and warranty requirements.
2.2 CARPET CUSHION (where specifically noted)
A. 3/8” rebound, 6 lb. density
12043 09 68 13 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SHEET CARPETING
BID PACKAGE NO.2 12/22/2014
2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based
formulation provided or recommended by carpet manufacturer.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor
conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and is
recommended or provided by carpet and carpet cushion manufacturers.
1. Use adhesives with VOC content not more than 50 g/L when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Use adhesives that comply with the product requirements of the California Department of
Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from
Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
C. Tackless Carpet Stripping: Water-resistant plywood, in strips as required to match cushion
thickness and that comply with CRI 104, Section 12.2.
D. Seam Adhesive: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet
manufacturer for sealing and taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure
seams and to prevent pile loss at seams.
E. Metal Edge/Transition Strips: Extruded aluminum with finish of profile and width shown, of
height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running
joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other
conditions affecting carpet performance. Examine carpet for type, color, pattern, and potential
defects.
B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:
1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other
materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness
characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet
manufacturer.
2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place
Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet.
3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
C. For wood subfloors, verify the following:
1. Underlayment over subfloor complies with requirements specified in Section 06 10 00
"Rough Carpentry."
2. Underlayment surface is free of irregularities and substances that may interfere with
adhesive bond or show through surface.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
12043 09 68 13 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SHEET CARPETING
BID PACKAGE NO.2 12/22/2014
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with
carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks,
holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch, unless
more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical
methods recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer.
D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations and Shop Drawings for seam
locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At
doorways, center seams under the door in closed position.
B. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet.
C. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture
including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as
recommended by carpet manufacturer.
D. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable
flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking
device.
F. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Patterned
Carpet Installations" and with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations.
G. Comply with carpet cushion manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet:
1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner
recommended by carpet manufacturer.
2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface.
3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.
B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations."
C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and
fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or
12043 09 68 13 - 5
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SHEET CARPETING
BID PACKAGE NO.2 12/22/2014
recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer and carpet cushion and adhesive
manufacturers.
END OF SECTION 09 68 13
12043 09 68 13 - 6
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SHEET CARPETING
BID PACKAGE NO.2 12/22/2014
This page intentionally left blank.
12043 09 91 00 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN INTERIOR PAINTING
BID PACKAGE NO.2 12/22/2014
SECTION 09 91 00 - PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following
substrates:
1. Wood.
2. Gypsum board.
3. Spray-textured ceilings and walls
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application
instructions.
1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
B. Samples for Verification: Provide a drawdown of each paint color. Size to be minimum 3” x 6”
1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Paint: 2 percent, but not less 5 gallon of each material and color applied.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 degree F.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are
between 50 and 95 degree F.
B. Do not apply paints to damp or wet surfaces.
12043 09 91 00 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN INTERIOR PAINTING
BID PACKAGE NO.2 12/22/2014
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Behr Process Corporation.
2. Benjamin Moore & Co.
3. Kelly-Moore Paints.
4. M.A.B. Paints.
5. Pratt & Lambert.
6. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed
in its "MPI Approved Products List."
B. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
C. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule.
2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS
A. Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior.
B. Primer, Latex, for Interior Wood.
C. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint
systems indicated.
2.4 WATER-BASED PAINTS
A. Latex, Interior, Flat, (Gloss Level 1, and 5).
2.5 TEXTURED COATING
A. Primer for Textured Coating, Latex, Flat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.
B. Intermediate Coat for Textured Coating, Latex, Flat: As recommended in writing by topcoat
manufacturer.
1. Textured Coating, Latex, Flat
12043 09 91 00 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN INTERIOR PAINTING
BID PACKAGE NO.2 12/22/2014
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter
as follows:
1. Wood: 15 percent.
2. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.
D. Spray-Textured Ceiling Substrates: Verify that surfaces are dry.
E. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
F. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual"
applicable to substrates indicated.
B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease,
and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie
coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
C. Wood Substrates:
1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.
2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood
filler. Sand smooth when dried.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI
Manual."
B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
12043 09 91 00 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN INTERIOR PAINTING
BID PACKAGE NO.2 12/22/2014
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and
inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and
leave in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Wood Substrates: Including wood trim, architectural woodwork, doors.
1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5).
B. Gypsum Board Substrates:
1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 4).
C. Textured Subtrates:
1. As recommended by textured finish manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 09 91 00
12043 12 35 30 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN KITCHEN CASEWORK
BID PACKAGE NO.2 12/22/2014
SECTION 12 35 30 - KITCHEN CASEWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Wood-faced kitchen cabinets.
2. Wood-faced vanity cabinets.
3. Stone-material countertops.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures" for sink units mounted in countertops.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Stone countertops
2. Cabinet hardware
B. Shop Drawings: For cabinets and countertops. Include plans, elevations, details, and
attachments to other work. Show materials, finishes, filler panels, hardware, edge and
backsplash profiles, cutouts for plumbing fixtures, and methods of joining countertops.
12043 12 35 30 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN KITCHEN CASEWORK
BID PACKAGE NO.2 12/22/2014
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Cabinets: Obtain cabinets through one source from a single
manufacturer or fabricator.
B. Product Designations: Other manufacturers' casework of similar sizes, similar door and
drawer configurations, same finish material, and complying with the Specifications may
be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."
C. Quality Standards: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the following standards:
1. Cabinets: KCMA A161.1.
a. KCMA Certification: Provide cabinets with KCMA's "Certified Cabinet"
seal affixed in a semiexposed location of each unit and showing
compliance with the above standard.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Established Dimensions: Where kitchen casework is indicated to fit to other construction,
establish dimensions for areas where casework is to fit. Coordinate construction to
ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. Provide fillers and
scribes to allow for trimming and fitting.
B. Field Measurements: Where kitchen casework is indicated to fit to existing construction,
verify dimensions of existing construction by field measurements before fabrication and
indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Provide fillers and scribes if necessary.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of blocking and reinforcement in partitions for support
of kitchen casework.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Cabinets:
a. Masco Cabinets
b. Other as selected by Owner
2.2 COLORS, TEXTURES, AND PATTERNS
A. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Refer to drawings.
12043 12 35 30 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN KITCHEN CASEWORK
BID PACKAGE NO.2 12/22/2014
2.3 CABINET MATERIALS
A. Exposed Materials: Comply with the following:
1. Exposed Wood Species: As follows: Do not use two adjacent exposed faces that
are noticeably dissimilar in color, grain, figure, or natural character markings.
a. Hard Maple
2. Solid Wood: Clear hardwood lumber of species indicated, free of defects,
selected for compatible grain and color, and kiln dried to 7 percent moisture
content.
3. Plywood: Hardwood plywood complying with HPVA HP-1 with face veneer of
species indicated, selected for compatible color and grain with Grade A faces
and Grade C backs of same species as faces.
a. Edge band exposed edges with minimum 1/8-inch- thick, solid-wood
edging of same species as face veneer.
B. Semiexposed Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
1. Solid Wood: Sound hardwood lumber, selected to eliminate appearance defects
and kiln dried to 7 percent moisture content. Stained to be compatible with ex-
posed surfaces.
2. Plywood: Hardwood plywood complying with HPVA HP-1 with Grade C faces
stained to be compatible with exposed surfaces and Grade 3 backs of same
species as faces.
C. Concealed Materials: Comply with the following:
1. Solid Wood or Plywood: Any hardwood or softwood species, with no defects
affecting strength or utility. Hardwood and softwood lumber kiln dried to 7 and 10
percent moisture content, respectively.
2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
3. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2.
4. Hardboard: AHA A135.4, Class 1 Tempered.
2.4 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS
A. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
B. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch
sanded.
C. Granite Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 615.
2.5 ADHESIVES, GROUT, SEALANTS, AND STONE ACCESSORIES FOR COUNTERTOPS
A. General: Use only adhesives formulated for stone and ceramic tile and that are
recommended by their manufacturer for the application indicated.
B. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3.
12043 12 35 30 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN KITCHEN CASEWORK
BID PACKAGE NO.2 12/22/2014
C. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, chemical-resistant, water-cleanable, tile-
setting and -grouting epoxy.
D. Stone Adhesive: Two-part epoxy or polyester adhesive, formulated specifically for
bonding stone to stone, with an initial set time of not more than two hours at 70 degree F.
1. Color: Match stone.
E. Sealant for Countertops: Manufacturer's standard sealant of characteristics indicated
below that complies with applicable requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants"
and will not stain the stone it is applied to.
F. Stone Cleaner: Specifically formulated for stone types, finishes, and applications
indicated, as recommended by stone producer and, if a sealer is specified, by sealer
manufacturer. Do not use cleaning compounds containing acids, caustics, harsh fillers,
or abrasives.
G. Stone Sealer: Colorless, stain-resistant sealer that does not affect color or physical
properties of stone surfaces, as recommended by stone producer for application
indicated.
2.6 CASEWORK HARDWARE
A. General: Manufacturer's standard units complying with BHMA A156.9, of type, material,
size, and finish as selected from manufacturer's standard choices.
B. Hinges: Semiconcealed (wraparound) butt hinges for overlay doors.
C. Drawer Guides: Epoxy-coated-metal, self-closing drawer guides; designed to prevent re-
bound when drawers are closed; with nylon-tired, ball-bearing rollers; and complying with
BHMA A156.9, Type B05091.
2.7 CABINET CONSTRUCTION
A. Face Style: Flush overlay; door and drawer faces cover cabinet body members or face
frames with only enough space between faces for operating clearance.
B. Face Frames: 3/4-by-1-5/8-inch solid wood with glued mortise and tenon or doweled
joints.
C. Door and Drawer Fronts: Solid-wood stiles and rails, 5/8 inch thick, with 3/4-inch- thick,
solid-wood center panels.
D. Exposed Cabinet Ends: Veneer-faced plywood.
E. Cabinet Ends: 5/8-inch- thick particleboard or 1/2-inch- thick plywood.
F. Back, Top, and Bottom Rails: 3/4-by-2-1/2-inch solid wood, interlocking with end panels
and rabbeted to receive top and bottom panels. Back rails secured under pressure with
glue and with mechanical fasteners.
G. Front Frame Drawer Rails: 3/4-by-1-1/4-inch solid wood mortised and fastened into face
frame.
12043 12 35 30 - 5
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN KITCHEN CASEWORK
BID PACKAGE NO.2 12/22/2014
H. Shelves: 3/4-inch- thick particleboard or 5/8-inch- thick plywood.
I. Joinery: Rabbet backs flush into end panels and secure with concealed mechanical
fasteners. Connect tops and bottoms of wall cabinets and bottoms and stretchers of
base cabinets to ends and dividers with mechanical fasteners. Rabbet tops, bottoms,
and backs into end panels.
J. Factory Finishing: To greatest extent possible, finish casework at factory. Defer only
final touchup until after installation.
2.8 STONE COUNTERTOPS
A. General: Comply with recommendations in MIA's "Dimension Stone - Design Manual VI."
B. Nominal Thickness: Provide thickness indicated, but not less than 3/4 inch. Gage backs
to provide units of identical thickness.
C. Edge Detail: Bullnose with eased edge.
D. Splashes: Provide 2 cm thick backsplashes and end splashes unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Height: As indicated.
2. Top-Edge Detail: Straight, slightly eased at corner.
E. Joints: Fabricate countertops without joints to the greatest extent feasible.
F. Cutouts and Holes:
1. Fixtures: Make cutouts for undercounter fixtures in shop using template or
pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves.
a. Provide vertical edges, rounded to 3/8-inch radius at juncture of cutout
edges with top surface of countertop, slightly eased at bottom, and
projecting 3/16 inch into fixture opening.
2. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings, undercounter soap
dispensers, and similar items.
12043 12 35 30 - 6
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN KITCHEN CASEWORK
BID PACKAGE NO.2 12/22/2014
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install casework with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces; use concealed
shims. Where casework abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Pro-
vide filler strips, scribe strips, and moldings in finish to match casework face.
B. Install casework without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are aligned.
Complete installation of hardware and accessories as indicated.
C. Install casework and countertop level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet.
D. Fasten cabinets to adjacent units and to backing.
1. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not less
than 24 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch penetration
into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips.
2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not less
than 24 inches o.c., with toggle bolts through metal backing behind gypsum
board.
E. Install stone countertops over plywood subtops with full spread of water-cleanable epoxy
adhesive.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust casework and hardware so doors and drawers are centered in openings and op-
erate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by
manufacturer.
B. Clean casework on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied fin-
ishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION 12 35 30
12043 14 21 00 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
SECTION 14 21 00 - ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes electric traction passenger elevators.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for the following:
a. Attachment plates and angle brackets for supporting guide-rail brackets.
b. Hoist beams.
c. Structural-steel shapes for subsills.
d. Pit ladders.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions in ASME A17.1/CSA B44 apply to work of this Section.
B. Service Elevator: A passenger elevator that is also used to carry freight.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features,
finishes, and similar information. Include product data for car enclosures, hoistway
entrances, and operation, control, and signal systems.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at
each landing, controller closet coordination, relationships with other construction,
and locations of equipment.
2. Include large-scale layout of car-control station.
3. Indicate maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at
points of support, and maximum and average power demands.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For finishes involving color selection.
12043 14 21 00 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For elevator equipment, accessories, and
components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
C. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway, pit,
and controller closet layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical
service, as shown and specified, are adequate for elevator system being provided.
D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For elevators to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
B. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by
authorities having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use.
C. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Submit a continuing maintenance proposal from
Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard one-year maintenance agreement, starting
on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions,
and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Elevator manufacturer or an authorized representative who is
trained and approved by manufacturer.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle materials, components, and equipment in manufacturer's
protective packaging. Store materials, components, and equipment off of ground, under
cover, and in a dry location.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of sleeves, block outs, elevator equipment with integral anchors,
and other items that are embedded in concrete or masonry for elevator equipment.
Furnish templates, sleeves, elevator equipment with integral anchors, and installation
instructions and deliver to Project site in time for installation.
12043 14 21 00 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
B. Coordinate locations and dimensions of other work relating to electric traction elevators
including pit ladders; sumps and floor drains in pits; entrance subsills; electrical service;
and electrical outlets, lights, and switches in hoistways, pits, and machine rooms.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair, restore, or replace
elevator work that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, operation or control system failure,
including excessive malfunctions; performances below specified ratings;
excessive wear; unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes; unsafe
conditions; need for excessive maintenance; abnormal noise or vibration; and
similar unusual, unexpected, and unsatisfactory conditions.
2. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following :
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide KONE
Eco-sace or comparable product by one of the following:
1. KONE Inc.
2. Schindler Elevator Corp.
3. ThyssenKrupp Elevator.
4. Otis, Inc.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain elevators from single manufacturer.
1. Major elevator components, including driving machines, controllers, signal
fixtures, door operators, car frames, cars, and entrances, shall be manufactured
by single manufacturer.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44.
B. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with Section 407 in the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with
ICC A117.1.
C. Seismic Performance: Elevator system shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 and shall comply with elevator safety requirements
for seismic risk Zone 1 or greater in ASME A17.1/CSA B44.
12043 14 21 00 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
D. Fire-Rated Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Door and frame assemblies complying with
NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated.
E. Additional Requirements: Comply with applicable regulations, including IBC 2006 Article
3002.4 whereby certain elevators must accommodate 24 by 84 inches ambulance
stretcher.
1. Proposed modification G-188-07/08 to the 2009 IBC Article 3002.4 states that
stretcher may have rounded corners with a 5 inches radius for the purpose of
determining the appropriate elevator cab size. Verify applicability of this
modification with local building authority.
2.3 ELEVATORS
A. Elevator System, General: Manufacturer's standard elevator systems. Unless otherwise
indicated, manufacturer's standard components shall be used, as included in standard
elevator systems and as required for complete system.
B. Service / Passenger Description:
1. Elevator Number(s): 1
2. Machine Location: Machine in shaft, adjacent machine “panel” room provided
3. Rated Load: 3500 lb.
4. Rated Speed: 150 fpm.
5. Operation System: automatic operation.
6. Auxiliary Operations:
a. Battery lowering feature
b. Earthquake Emergency Operation: Comply with requirements in
ASME A17.1/CSA B44.
c. Automatic dispatching of loaded car.
d. Nuisance call cancel.
e. Priority service at all floors.
f. Loaded-car bypass.
7. Security Features: Keyswitch operation.
8. Car Enclosures:
a. Inside Width: Minimum 7’-8” inches from side wall to side wall.
b. Inside Depth: Minimum 6’-10” inches from back wall to front wall (return
panels).
c. Inside Height: Minimum 9’-0” to underside of ceiling.
d. Front Walls (Return Panels): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
e. Car Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
f. Side and Rear Wall Panels: Manufacturer’s standard plastic laminate.
g. Reveals: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
h. Door Faces (Interior): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
i. Door Sills: Aluminum, mill finish.
j. Ceiling: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
k. Handrails: 1/2 by 2 inches rectangular satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish,
at sides and rear of car.
l. Floor prepared to receive carpet tile
12043 14 21 00 - 5
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
9. Hoistway Entrances:
a. Width: 42 inches.
b. Height: 96 inches.
c. Type: Single-speed center opening.
d. Frames: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish (first floor), Painted steel (all
other floors).
e. Doors: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
f. Sills: Aluminum, mill finish.
10. Hall Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
11. Additional Requirements:
a. Provide inspection certificate in each car, mounted under acrylic cover
with frame made from satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
b. Provide hooks for protective pads in all cars and one complete set(s) of
full-height protective pads.
C. Passenger Description:
1. Elevator Number(s): 2
2. Machine Location: Machine in shaft, adjacent machine “panel” room provided
3. Rated Load: 2500 lb.
4. Rated Speed: 150 fpm.
5. Operation System: automatic operation.
6. Auxiliary Operations:
a. Battery lowering feature
b. Earthquake Emergency Operation: Comply with requirements in
ASME A17.1/CSA B44.
c. Automatic dispatching of loaded car.
d. Nuisance call cancel.
e. Priority service at all floors.
f. Loaded-car bypass.
7. Security Features: Keyswitch operation.
8. Car Enclosures:
a. Inside Width: Minimum 7’-8” inches from side wall to side wall.
b. Inside Depth: Minimum 5’-10” inches from back wall to front wall (return
panels).
c. Inside Height: minimum 8’-0” inches to underside of ceiling.
d. Front Walls (Return Panels): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
e. Car Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
f. Side and Rear Wall Panels: Manufacturer’s standard plastic laminate.
g. Reveals: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
h. Door Faces (Interior): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
i. Door Sills: Aluminum, mill finish.
j. Ceiling: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
k. Handrails: 1/2 by 2 inches rectangular satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish,
at sides and rear of car.
l. Floor prepared to receive carpet tile
9. Hoistway Entrances:
12043 14 21 00 - 6
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
a. Width: 42 inches.
b. Height: 84 inches.
c. Type: Single-speed center opening.
d. Frames: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish (first floor), Painted steel (all
other floors).
e. Doors: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
f. Sills: Aluminum, mill finish.
10. Hall Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
11. Additional Requirements:
a. Provide inspection certificate in each car, mounted under acrylic cover
with frame made from satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
b. Provide hooks for protective pads in all cars and one complete set(s) of
full-height protective pads.
2.4 TRACTION SYSTEMS
A. Elevator Machines: Variable-voltage, variable-frequency, ac-type hoisting machines and
solid-state power converters.
1. Machine shall be permanent magnet AC gearless traction type.
2. Provide nonregenerative system.
3. Provide line filters or chokes to prevent electrical peaks or spikes from feeding
back into building power system.
B. Fluid for Hydraulic Buffers: If using hydraulic buffers, use only fire-resistant fluid.
C. Inserts: Furnish required concrete and masonry inserts and similar anchorage devices
for installing guide rails, machinery, and other components of elevator work. Device
installation is specified in another Section.
D. Machine Beams: Provide framing to support elevator hoisting machine and deflector
sheaves from the building structure. Comply with Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications"
for materials and fabrication.
E. Car Frame and Platform: Bolted- or welded-steel units.
F. Guides: Roller guides or polymer-coated, nonlubricated sliding guides. Provide guides
at top and bottom of car and counterweight frames.
G. Sound Reducing: Provide sound reducing materials to effectively isolate the elevator
equipment from floors and structure.
1. Control system shall be arranged to eliminate mechanical vibration, airborne
noise and structurally transmitted vibrations from control generated power
transients.
2.5 OPERATION SYSTEMS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation systems as required
to provide type of operation indicated.
12043 14 21 00 - 7
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
B. Auxiliary Operations: In addition to primary operation system features, provide the
following operational features for elevators where indicated:
1. Automatic Dispatching of Loaded Car: When car load exceeds 80 percent of
rated capacity, doors begin closing.
2. Nuisance Call Cancel: When car calls exceed a preset number while car load is
less than a predetermined weight, all car calls are canceled. Preset number of
calls and predetermined weight can be adjusted.
3. Loaded-Car Bypass: When car load exceeds 80 percent of rated capacity, car
responds only to car calls, not to hall calls.
4. Distributed Parking: When cars are not required for response to calls, they are
parked with doors closed and distributed in predetermined zones throughout the
building. One zone shall include the main floor and adjacent floors; remaining
floors shall be divided into approximately equal zones.
5. Independent Service: Keyswitch in car-control station removes car from group
operation and allows it to respond only to car calls. Key cannot be removed from
keyswitch when car is in independent service. When in independent service,
doors close only in response to door close button.
6. Priority Service: Service is initiated by a keyswitch at designated floors. One
elevator is removed from group operation and directed to the floor where service
was initiated. On arriving at the floor, elevator opens its doors and parks. Car is
placed in operation by selecting a floor and pressing door close button or by
operating keyswitch to put car in independent service. After responding to floor
selected or being removed from independent service, car is returned to group
operation. If car is not placed in operation within a preset time after being called,
it is returned to group operation.
2.6 DOOR REOPENING DEVICES
A. Infrared Array: Provide door reopening device with uniform array of 36 or more micro-
processor-controlled, infrared light beams projecting across car entrance. Interruption of
one or more light beams shall cause doors to stop and reopen.
2.7 CAR ENCLOSURES
A. General: Provide steel-framed car enclosures with nonremovable wall panels, with
removable car roof, access doors, power door operators, and ventilation.
1. Provide standard railings complying with ASME A17.1/CSA B44 on car tops
where required by ASME A17.1/CSA B44.
B. Materials and Finishes: Manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following:
1. Subfloor: Exterior, underlayment grade plywood, not less than 5/8-inch nominal
thickness.
2. Floor Finish: Specified in 0930000 - Tiling
3. Plastic-Laminate Wall Panels: Plastic laminate adhesively applied to
manufacturer's standard honeycomb core with plastic-laminate panel backing
and manufacturer's standard protective edge trim. Panels have a flame-spread
index of 75 or less, when tested according to ASTM E 84. Plastic-laminate color,
texture, and pattern as selected by Architect from elevator manufacturer's full
range.
4. Fabricate car with recesses and cutouts for signal equipment.
12043 14 21 00 - 8
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
5. Fabricate car door frame integrally with front wall of car.
6. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from
stainless-steel sheet or by laminating stainless-steel sheet to exposed faces and
edges of enameled cold-rolled steel doors using adhesive that fully bonds metal
to metal without telegraphing or oil-canning.
7. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on car doors.
8. Sills: Extruded metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch thick.
9. Metal Ceiling: Flush panels, with four LED downlights in each panel. Align
ceiling panel joints with joints between wall panels.
10. Polycarbonate Ceiling: Translucent polycarbonate ceiling with aluminum frame
and fluorescent light fixtures.
11. Handrails: Manufacturer's standard handrails, of shape, metal, and finish
indicated.
2.8 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES
A. Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Manufacturer's standard horizontal-sliding, door-and-
frame hoistway entrances complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories.
Frame size and profile shall accommodate hoistway wall construction.
1. Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, frames shall be self-
supporting with reinforced head sections.
B. Fire-Rated Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Door and frame assemblies shall comply
with NFPA 80 and be listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction based on testing at as close-to-neutral pressure as possible
according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B.
1. Fire-Protection Rating: 1-1/2 hours.
C. Materials and Fabrication: Manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following:
1. Primed-Steel Frames: Formed from cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. Provide with
factory-applied, rust-resistant primer for field painting.
2. Steel Subframes: Formed from cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet, with factory-
applied enamel finish or rust-resistant primer. Fabricate to receive applied finish
as indicated.
3. Stainless-Steel Frames: Formed from stainless-steel sheet.
4. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from
stainless-steel sheet or by laminating stainless-steel sheet to exposed faces and
edges of enameled cold-rolled steel doors using adhesive that fully bonds metal
to metal without telegraphing or oil-canning.
5. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on doors matching door edges.
6. Sills: Extruded metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch thick.
7. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M.
2.9 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT
A. General: Provide hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit
until call has been fulfilled. Fabricate lighted elements with long-life lamps and acrylic or
other permanent, non-yellowing translucent plastic diffusers or LEDs.
12043 14 21 00 - 9
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
B. General: Provide signal equipment designed for destination-based system. Fabricate
lighted elements with long-life lamps and acrylic or other permanent, nonyellowing
translucent plastic diffusers or LEDs.
C. Car-Control Stations: Provide manufacturer's standard recessed car-control stations.
Mount in return panel adjacent to car door unless otherwise indicated.
1. Mark buttons and switches for required use or function. Use both tactile symbols
and Braille.
2. Provide "No Smoking" sign matching car-control station, either integral with
car-control station or mounted adjacent to it, with text and graphics as required
by authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Emergency Communication System: Two-way voice communication system, with visible
signal, which dials preprogrammed number of monitoring station and does not require
handset use. System is contained in flush-mounted cabinet, with identification, instruc-
tions for use, and battery backup power supply.
E. Car Position Indicator: Provide illuminated, digital-type car position indicator, located
above car door or above car-control station. Also, provide audible signal to indicate to
passengers that car is either stopping at or passing each of the floors served. Include
travel direction arrows if not provided in car-control station.
F. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide one hall push-button station at each landing.
1. Provide manufacturer's standard wall-mounted units.
2. Equip units with buttons for calling elevator and for indicating desired direction of
travel.
3. Equip units with buttons for calling elevator and for indicating direction of travel or
destination as required by system. Provide a signaling system to verify floor se-
lection, where destination registration is required, and to direct passengers to
appropriate car.
G. Provide telephone jack in each unit for firefighters' two-way telephone communication
service if required by AHJ.
1. Possibly insert a provision for either an "In Use" signal or a digital display of car
position for single elevators.
H. Hall Lanterns: Units with illuminated arrows; but provide single arrow at terminal
landings. Provide one of the following:
1. Manufacturer's standard wall-mounted units, for mounting above entrance
frames.
2. Units with flat faceplate for mounting with body of unit recessed in wall and with
illuminated elements projecting from faceplate for ease of angular viewing.
3. Units mounted in both jambs of entrance frame for each elevator.
4. Units mounted in both car door jambs.
I. Hall Annunciator: With each hall lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival
and direction of travel. Signals sound once for up and twice for down.
1. At manufacturer's option, audible signals may be placed on cars.
12043 14 21 00 - 10
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
J. Hall Position Indicators: Provide illuminated, digital-display-type position indicators,
located above each hoistway entrance at ground floor. Provide units with flat faceplate
for mounting and with body of unit recessed in wall.
1. Integrate ground-floor hall lanterns with hall position indicators.
K. Fire-Command-Center Annunciator Panel: Provide panel containing illuminated position
indicators for each elevator, clearly labeled with elevator designation; include illuminated
signal that indicates when elevator is operational and when it is at the designated
emergency return level with doors open. Provide standby power elevator selector
switch(es), as required by ASME A17.1/CSA B44, adjacent to position indicators.
Provide illuminated signal that indicates when normal power supply has failed.
L. Emergency Pictorial Signs: Fabricate from materials matching hall push-button stations,
with text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction, indicating that in case
of fire, elevators are out of service and exits should be used instead. Provide one sign at
each hall push-button station unless otherwise indicated.
1. Refer to ASME A17.1, Appendix O “Elevator Corridor Call Station Pictograph”.
2.10 FINISH MATERIALS
A. General: Provide the following materials for exposed parts of elevator car enclosures,
car doors, hoistway entrance doors and frames, and signal equipment as indicated.
B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B, exposed,
matte finish.
C. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, commercial steel, Type B, pickled.
D. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.
E. Textured Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 with embossed texture
rolled into exposed surface.
1. Metal surface is satin polished after texturing.
F. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276, Type 304.
G. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063.
H. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure type complying with NEMA LD 3, Type HGS for flat
applications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elevator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Examine
hoistways, hoistway openings, pits, and machine rooms as constructed; verify critical
12043 14 21 00 - 11
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
dimensions; and examine supporting structure and other conditions under which elevator
work is to be installed.
B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to
performance of the Work.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and Authorities Having Jurisdiction
requirements.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting elevator
use (either temporary or permanent), perform acceptance tests as required and recom-
mended by ASME A17.1/CSA B44 and by governing regulations and agencies.
B. Operating Test: Load each elevator to rated capacity and operate continuously for 30
minutes over full travel distance, stopping at each level and proceeding immediately to
the next. Record temperature rise of elevator machine during 30-minute test period.
Record failure to perform as required.
C. Advise Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction in advance of dates and times
that tests are to be performed on elevators.
3.4 MAINTENANCE
A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service
shall include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of elevator Installer.
Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective
components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation
at rated speed and capacity. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized
replacement parts and supplies.
1. Perform maintenance during normal working hours.
2. Perform emergency callback service during normal working hours with response
time of two hours or less.
3. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week emergency callback service with
response time of two hours or less.
END OF SECTION 14 21 00
12043 31 10 00 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SITE CLEARING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
SECTION 31 10 00 - SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Protecting existing vegetation to remain.
2. Removing existing vegetation.
3. Clearing and grubbing.
4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil.
5. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements.
6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing site utilities.
7. Temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures.
1.2 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP
A. Except for stripped topsoil and other materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise remain
Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed
from Project site.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied
or used facilities during site-clearing operations.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities
without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's
premises where directed.
C. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site
clearing.
D. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control
measures are in place.
E. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:
1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material.
2. Parking vehicles or equipment.
3. Foot traffic.
4. Erection of sheds or structures.
5. Impoundment of water.
6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated.
12043 31 10 00 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SITE CLEARING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise
indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in
Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
1. Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site when satisfactory soil material is not
available on-site.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during
construction.
B. Locate and clearly identify trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain or to be relocated.
C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.
1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.
3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
A. Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways,
according to erosion and sedimentation control Drawings and requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction
activity do not enter or cross protection zones.
C. Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction
until permanent vegetation has been established.
D. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during
removal.
3.3 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
A. Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that
are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect.
12043 31 10 00 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SITE CLEARING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
3.4 EXISTING UTILITIES
A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap utilities indicated to be removed or abandoned in
place.
1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities.
B. Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to permit installation of new
construction.
1. Grind down stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris to a depth of 18 inches
below exposed subgrade.
B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material
unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.
1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches, and
compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.
3.6 TOPSOIL STRIPPING
A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.
B. Strip topsoil to a depth as required in the field in a manner to prevent intermingling with
underlying subsoil or other waste materials.
C. Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and
shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust and erosion by water.
3.7 SITE IMPROVEMENTS
A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and necessary to facilitate
new construction.
3.8 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste
materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
12043 31 10 00 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SITE CLEARING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
B. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable materials.
Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling
facilities. Do not interfere with other Project work.
END OF SECTION 31 10 00
12043 31 20 00 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN EARTH MOVING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
SECTION 31 20 00 - EARTH MOVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, turf and grasses, and plants.
2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.
3. Drainage course for concrete slabs-on-grade.
4. Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements.
5. Subbase course and base course for asphalt paving.
6. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation.
1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to
support sides of pipe.
2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
B. Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.
C. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying
pipe.
D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
E. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward
capillary flow of pore water.
F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and
dimensions indicated.
1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond
indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation
and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in
the Work.
2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated
lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as
remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.
G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical
and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or
below the ground surface.
12043 31 20 00 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN EARTH MOVING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
I. Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix
asphalt pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete
pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.
J. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill
immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.
K. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground
services within buildings.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Preexcavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before
beginning earth moving operations.
B. Do not commence earth moving operations until all erosion and sediment control measures are
in place.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not
available from excavations.
B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to
ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in
any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.
Groups GC, SC, CL, and ML may be considered satisfactory soils when deemed so by the
Geotechnical Testing and Inspection Agency and maintained within 2 percent of optimum
moisture content at time of compaction. Structural fill should have a liquid limit less than 40 and
a plasticity index less than 20. Coordinate all fill and compaction with the soils report.
C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to
ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups.
1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of
optimum moisture content at time of compaction.
D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch
sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
E. Base Course: As indicated on Drawings.
12043 31 20 00 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN EARTH MOVING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
F. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch
sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
G. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch
sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. Or as otherwise indicated on
Drawings.
H. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed
gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch
sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve. Or as otherwise indicated on Drawings.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for
marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously
inscribed with a description of the utility; colored to comply with local practice or requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape
manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and
4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in
a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up
to 30 inches deep; colored to comply with local practice or requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth
moving operations.
B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth moving operations.
C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove
temporary protection before placing subsequent materials.
3.2 EXCAVATION, GENERAL
A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of
surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include
rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time
will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.
1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials
and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.
12043 31 20 00 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN EARTH MOVING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
3.3 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If
applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing
concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.
1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation.
Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms
to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
3.4 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS
A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations,
and subgrades.
3.5 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.
B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or
conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe
or conduit unless otherwise indicated.
1. Clearance: 12 inches each side of pipe or conduit or as otherwise indicated on
Drawings.
C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of
pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels
of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones, obstructions,
and sharp objects along trench subgrade.
1. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding
bearing material, 4 inches deeper elsewhere, to allow for bedding course.
3.6 SUBGRADE INSPECTION
A. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with a pneumatic-tired dump truck
to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated
subgrades.
B. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or
construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation.
3.7 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of
concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean
concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2000 psi, may be used when approved by
Architect.
12043 31 20 00 - 5
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN EARTH MOVING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by
Architect.
3.8 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing.
Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
3.9 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding
course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings,
and bodies of conduits.
C. Trenches under Footings: Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of
bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings.
Concrete is specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
D. Trenches under Roadways: Provide 4-inch thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or
conduit less than 24 inches below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely
encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches of concrete before backfilling or placing
roadway subbase course.
E. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material or satisfactory soil, free of particles larger
than 1 inch in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches over the pipe or conduit.
1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both
sides and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of
piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.
F. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.
G. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches
below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
3.10 SOIL FILL
A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill
material will bond with existing material.
B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:
1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.
2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.
3. Under steps and ramps, use satisfactory soil material.
4. Under building slabs, use satisfactory soil material.
12043 31 20 00 - 6
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN EARTH MOVING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
5. Under footings and foundations, satisfactory soil material.
3.11 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL
A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before
compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain
frost or ice.
2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that
exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified
dry unit weight.
3.12 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS
A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material
compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for
material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and
uniformly along the full length of each structure.
C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight
according to ASTM D 1557:
1. Under building slabs, steps, and pavements (and within 5 feet), scarify and recompact
top 10 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95
percent. Increase to 100 percent for fill supporting footings.
2. Under walkways (and within 5 feet), scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade
and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.
3. Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and
compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent.
4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 95
percent.
3.13 GRADING
A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply
with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.
B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding.
Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:
1. Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch.
2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch.
3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-
foot straightedge.
12043 31 20 00 - 7
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN EARTH MOVING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
3.14 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES UNDER PAVEMENTS AND WALKS
A. Place subbase course and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course and base course under pavements and walks as
follows:
1. Shape subbase course and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope
grades.
2. Place subbase course and base course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in
layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than
3 inches thick.
3. Compact subbase course and base course at optimum moisture content to required
grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry
unit weight according to ASTM D 698.
3.15 DRAINAGE COURSE UNDER CONCRETE SLABS-ON-GRADE
A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-
on-grade as follows:
1. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal
thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches (75
mm) thick.
2. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not
less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557.
3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to
perform tests and inspections.
B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with
subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with
requirements.
C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed
to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing
subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when
approved by Architect.
D. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of
compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to
depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
3.17 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep
free of trash and debris.
12043 31 20 00 - 8
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN EARTH MOVING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed
surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent
construction operations or weather conditions.
C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,
backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,
and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
3.18 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and
debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 31 20 00
12043 31 23 19 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN DEWATERING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
SECTION 31 23 19 - DEWATERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes construction dewatering.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Dewatering Performance: Design, furnish, install, test, operate, monitor, and maintain
dewatering system of sufficient scope, size, and capacity to control hydrostatic pressures and to
lower, control, remove, and dispose of ground water and permit excavation and construction to
proceed on dry, stable subgrades.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
beginning dewatering. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to survey adjacent
existing buildings, structures, and site improvements, establishing exact elevations at fixed
points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations.
1. During dewatering, regularly resurvey benchmarks, maintaining an accurate log of
surveyed elevations for comparison with original elevations. Promptly notify Architect if
changes in elevations occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent
construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide temporary grading to facilitate dewatering and control of surface water.
B. Monitor dewatering systems continuously.
C. Protect and maintain temporary erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in
Drawings, during dewatering operations.
12043 31 23 19 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN DEWATERING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
D. Install dewatering system utilizing wells, well points, or similar methods complete with pump
equipment, standby power and pumps, filter material gradation, valves, appurtenances, water
disposal, and surface-water controls.
1. Space well points or wells at intervals required to provide sufficient dewatering.
2. Use filters or other means to prevent pumping of fine sands or silts from the subsurface.
E. Before excavating below ground-water level, place system into operation to lower water to
specified levels. Operate system continuously until drains, sewers, and structures have been
constructed and fill materials have been placed or until dewatering is no longer required.
F. Provide an adequate system to lower and control ground water to permit excavation,
construction of structures, and placement of fill materials on dry subgrades. Install sufficient
dewatering equipment to drain water-bearing strata above and below bottom of foundations,
drains, sewers, and other excavations.
1. Do not permit open-sump pumping that leads to loss of fines, soil piping, subgrade
softening, and slope instability.
G. Reduce hydrostatic head in water-bearing strata below subgrade elevations of foundations,
drains, sewers, and other excavations.
1. Maintain piezometric water level a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) below surface of
excavation.
H. Provide standby equipment on site, installed and available for immediate operation, to maintain
dewatering on continuous basis if any part of system becomes inadequate or fails. If
dewatering requirements are not satisfied due to inadequacy or failure of dewatering system,
restore damaged structures and foundation soils at no additional expense to Owner.
1. Remove dewatering system from Project site on completion of dewatering. Plug or fill
well holes with sand or cut off and cap wells a minimum of 36 inches (900 mm) below
overlying construction.
END OF SECTION 31 23 19
12043 SECTION 313116 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN TERMITE CONTROL
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
SECTION 31 31 16 - TERMITE CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Soil treatment with termiticide.
1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of termite control product.
1. Include the EPA-Registered Label for termiticide products.
1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B. Product Certificates: For termite control products, from manufacturer.
C. Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed, submit
report for Owner's records and include the following:
1. Date and time of application.
2. Moisture content of soil before application.
3. Termiticide brand name and manufacturer.
4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used.
5. Dilutions, methods, volumes used, and rates of application.
6. Areas of application.
7. Water source for application.
D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authori-
ties having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction
where Project is located, and who employs workers trained and approved by manufac-
turer to install manufacturer's products.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides and termiticide devices ac-
cording to the EPA-Registered Label.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain termite control products from single source from single manu-
facturer.
12043 SECTION 313116 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN TERMITE CONTROL
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated
or frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with requirements of
the EPA-Registered Label and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, grading, and concreting op-
erations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-supported slabs before
construction.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Soil Treatment Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator
and Contractor, certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide
treatment, will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activi-
ty or damage is discovered during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace
damage caused by termite infestation.
1. Warranty Period: Five Insert number years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SOIL TREATMENT
A. Termiticide: Provide an EPA-Registered termiticide, complying with requirements of au-
thorities having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infesta-
tion. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maxi-
mum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to product's EPA-
Registered Label.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. BASF Corporation, Agricultural Products; Termidor.
b. Bayer Environmental Science; Premise 75.
c. FMC Corporation, Agricultural Products Group; Talstar.
d. Syngenta; Prelude.
2. Service Life of Treatment: Soil treatment termiticide that is effective for not less
than five years against infestation of subterranean termites.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for moisture content of soil per termiticide label requirements, interfaces
with earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, utility installation, and other con-
ditions affecting performance of termite control.
B. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction
and with manufacturer's written instructions for preparation before beginning application
12043 SECTION 313116 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN TERMITE CONTROL
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
of termite control treatment. Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other
edible materials such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and con-
struction waste wood from soil within and around foundations.
B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that
could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level
soil to be treated except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiti-
cides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended in writing
by termiticide manufacturer.
1. Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer,
complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3.03 APPLICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction
and with manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products.
3.04 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT
A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide
quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified
concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to the
following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is
established around and under building construction. Distribute treatment evenly.
1. Slabs-on-Grade and Basement Slabs: Under ground-supported slab construc-
tion, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treat-
ment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed.
2. Foundations: Adjacent soil, including soil along the entire inside perimeter of
foundation walls; along both sides of interior partition walls; around plumbing
pipes and electric conduit penetrating the slab; around interior column footers,
piers, and chimney bases; and along the entire outside perimeter, from grade to
bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings.
3. Crawlspaces: Soil under and adjacent to foundations as previously indicated.
Treat adjacent areas including around entrance platform, porches, and equip-
ment bases. Apply overall treatment only where attached concrete platform and
porches are on fill or ground.
4. Masonry: Treat voids.
5. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be
penetrated.
B. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely
dry.
C. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until
ground-supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-
Registered Label instructions.
D. Post warning signs in areas of application.
E. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading,
landscaping, or other construction activities following application.
12043 SECTION 313116 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN TERMITE CONTROL
BID PACKAGE NO. 2 12/22/2014
END OF SECTION
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
12043 316225 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN RAMMED AGGREGATE PIERS
SECTION 316225 – RAMMED AGGREGATE PIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Description: Work shall consist of designing, furnishing and installing Rammed Aggregate Pier
(RAP) foundations to the lines and grades designated on the project foundation plan(s) and as
specified herein. The aggregate piers shall be constructed by either augering a cavity or driving
a hollow mandrel to the design depth and vertically ramming lifts of aggregate using the
specially designed tamper head and high-energy impact densification equipment to create the
compacted aggregate pier. The RAP elements shall be in a columnar-type configuration and
shall be used to produce an intermediate foundation system for support of foundation loads.
B. Work Included:
1. Provision of all equipment, material, labor, and supervision to design and install RAP
elements. Design shall rely on subsurface information presented in the project
Geotechnical Report. Layout of RAP elements, spoil removal (as required), footing
excavations, and subgrade preparation following aggregate pier installations is not
included.
2. The RAP design and installation shall adhere to all methods and standards described in
this Specification.
C. Approved Installers:
1. The RAP Installer (the Installer) shall be approved by the Engineer of Record prior to bid
opening. Without exception, no alternate installer will be accepted unless approved by
the Engineer of Record at least two (2) weeks prior to bid opening.
2. Installers of RAP foundation systems shall have a minimum of five (5) years of
experience with installation of RAP systems and shall have completed at least 50
projects.
3. Installers licensed by the Geopier Foundation Company, Inc. (www. Geopier.om) will be
accepted as approved installer.
4. Without exception, no alternate installer will be accepted unless approved by the
Engineer of Record and Geopier Foundation Company, Inc.
5. Installers currently approved for these works are:
a. Advanced Foundation Systems, Centennial, CO.
b. Foundation Service Corporation, Hudson, IA.
c. Peterson Contractors, Inc., Reinbeck, IA.
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
12043 316225 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN RAMMED AGGREGATE PIERS
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Design:
1. “Control of Settlement and Uplift of Structures Using Short Aggregate Piers,” by Evert C.
Lawton (Assoc. Prof, Dept. of Civil Eng., Univ. of Utah), Nathaniel S. Fox (President,
Geopier Foundation Co., Inc.), and Richard L. Handy (Distinguished Prof. Emeritus, Iowa
State Univ., Dept of Civil Eng.), reprinted from IN-SITU DEEP SOIL IMPROVEMENT,
Proceedings of sessions sponsored by the Geotechnical Engineering Division/ASCE in
conjunction with the ASCE National Convention held October 9-13, 1994, Atlanta,
Georgia.
2. Settlement of Structures Supported on Marginal or Inadequate Soils Stiffened with Short
Aggregate Piers,” by Evert C. Lawton and Nathaniel S. Fox. Geotechnical Special
Publication No. 40: Vertical and Horizontal Deformations of Foundations and
Embankments, ASCE, 2, 962-974.
3. “Behavior of Geopier-Supported Foundation Systems during Seismic Events,” by Kord
Wissman, Evert C. Lawton, and Tom Farrelll. Geopier Foundation Company, Inc.,
Blacksburg, VA, copyright 1999.
B. Modulus Testing:
1. ASTM D 1143 – Pile Load Test Procedures.
2. ASTM D 1194 – Spread Footing Load Test.
C. Materials and Inspection:
1. ASTM D 1241 – Aggregate Quality.
2. ASTM D 442 – Gradation of Soils.
D. Where specifications and reference documents conflict, the RAP Designer shall make the final
determination of the applicable document.
1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. The design of the RAP system shall be based on the service load bearing pressure and the
allowable total and differential settlement criteria of all footings indicated by the design team for
support by the RAP system. The RAP systems shall be designed in accordance with generally-
accepted engineering practice and the methods described in 1.3.A above. The design life of the
structure shall be 50 years.
B. The design shall meet the following criteria:
1. Allowable Bearing Pressure for Footings supported by RAP Reinforced Soils: 6,000 psf
or greater.
2. Estimated Total Long-Term Settlement for Footings: < or = to 1-inch.
3. Estimated Long-Term Differential Settlement of Adjacent Footings: < or = to ½-inch.
C. The RAP elements shall be designed using a RAP stiffness modulus to be verified by the
results of the modulus test described in Section 3.4 of this Specification.
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
12043 316225 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN RAMMED AGGREGATE PIERS
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Design Submittal: The Installer shall submit detailed design calculations, construction drawings,
and shop drawings (the Design Submittal), for approval at least 3 weeks prior to the beginning
of construction. A detailed explanation of the design parameters for settlement calculations
shall be included in the Design Submittal. Additional, the quality control test program for
Aggregate Pier system, meeting these design requirements, shall be submitted. All computer-
generated calculations and drawings shall be prepared and sealed by a Professional Engineer,
licensed in the State of Indiana.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and Designer.
B. Design Calculations: The Installer shall submit design calculations prepared by the RAP
Designer (the Designer) for review and approval by the Engineer of Record. All calculations
and plans shall be sealed by a Professional Engineer, licensed in the State of Indiana.
C. Professional Liability Insurance: The RAP Designer shall have Errors and Omissions design
insurance for the work. The insurance policy should provide a minimum coverage of $3 million
per occurrence. The Designer shall submit a certificate of insurance prior to contract award.
D. Modulus Test Reports: A modulus test(s) is performed on a non-production RAP element as
required by the RAP Designer to verify the design assumptions. The Installer shall furnish the
General Contractor a description of the installation equipment, installation records, complete
test data, analysis of the test data and verification of the design parameter values on the
modulus test results. The report shall be prepared under the direction of a Registered
Professional Engineer.
E. Daily RAP Progress Reports: The Installer shall furnish a complete and accurate record of RAP
installation to the General Contractor. The record shall indicate the pier location, length, volume
of aggregate used or number of lifts, densification forces during installation, and final elevations
or depths of the base and top of piers. The record shall also indicate the type and size of the
installation equipment used, and the type of aggregate used. The Installer shall immediately
report any unusual conditions encountered during installation to the General Contractor, to the
Designer and to the Testing Agency.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1 AGGREGATE
A. Aggregate used by the RAP Installer for pier construction shall be pre-approved by the designer
and shall demonstrate suitable performance during modulus testing. Typical aggregate consists
of Type 1, Grade B in accordance with ASTM D 1241-68, No. 57 stone, recycled concrete or
other graded aggregate approved by the Designer.
B. Potable water or other suitable source shall be used to increase aggregate moisture content
where required. The General Contractor shall provide such water to the Installer.
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
12043 316225 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN RAMMED AGGREGATE PIERS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPROVED INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
A. The following sections provide general criteria for the construction of the RAP elements. Unless
otherwise approved by the Designer, the installation method used for RAP construction shall be
that as used in the construction of the successful modulus test.
B. Augered RAP systems:
1. Augered RAP system shall be pre-augered using mechanical drilling or excavation
equipment.
2. If cave-ins exceeding 10% of the lift volume occur during excavation such that the
sidewalls of the hole are deemed to be unstable, steel casing shall be used to stabilize
the cavity or a displacement RAP system may be used.
3. Aggregate shall be placed in the augered cavity in lift thicknesses as determined by the
RAP Designer.
4. A specially-designed beveled tamper and high-energy impact densification apparatus
shall be employed to densify lifts of aggregate during installation. The apparatus shall
apply direct downward impact energy to each lift of aggregate. Compaction equipment
that induces horizontal vibratory energy (such as Vibroflot equipment) is not permitted.
C. Displacement RAP systems:
1. Displacement RAP systems shall be constructed by advancing a specially designed
mandrel with a minimum 15 ton static force augmented by dynamic vertical ramming
energy to the full design depth. The hollow-shaft mandrel, filled with aggregate, is
incrementally raised, permitting the aggregate to be released into the cavity, and then
lowered by vertically advancing and/or ramming to densify the aggregate and force it
laterally into the adjacent soil. The cycle of raising and lowering the mandrel is repeated
to the top of pier elevation. The cycle distance shall be determined by the RAP Designer.
2. Special high-energy impact densification apparatus shall be employed to vertically
densify the RAP elements during installation of each constructed lift of aggregate.
3. Densification shall be performed using a mandrel/tamper. The mandrel/tamper foot is
required to adequately increase the lateral earth pressure in the matrix soil during
installation. Compaction equipment that induces horizontal vibratory energy (such as
Vibroflot equipment) is not permitted.
4. Downward crowd pressure shall be applied to the mandrel during installation.
3.2 PLAN LOCATION AND ELEVATION OF RAP ELEMENTS
A. The as-built center of each pier shall be within 6 inches of the location indicated on the plans.
Piers installed outside of the above tolerances and deemed not acceptable shall be rebuilt at no
additional expense to the Owner.
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
12043 316225 - 5
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN RAMMED AGGREGATE PIERS
3.3 REJECTED RAP ELEMENTS
A. RAP elements installed beyond the maximum allowable tolerances shall be abandoned and
replaced with new piers, unless the Designer approves the condition or provides other remedial
measures. All material and labor required to replace rejected piers shall be provided at no
additional cost to the Owner, unless the cause of rejection is due to obstruction or mislocation.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Control Technician: The installer shall have a full time, on-site Control Technician to verify and
report all installation procedures. The Installer shall immediately report any unusual conditions
encountered during installation to the RAP Designer, the General Contractor, and the Testing
Agency.
B. RAP Modulus Test: As required by the RAP Designer, a RAP Modulus Test(s) will be
performed at location(s) agreed upon by the RAP Designer and the Testing Agency to verify or
modify the RAP designs. Modulus Test Procedures shall utilize appropriate portions of the
ASTM D 1143 and ASTM D 1194, as outlined in the RAP design submittal.
C. Bottom Stabilization Testing (BST’s)/Crowd Stabilization Testing (CST’s): Bottom Stabilizations
Testing (BST’s) or Crowd Stabilization Testing (CST’s) shall be performed by the Control
Technician during the installation of the modulus test pier(s). Additional testing as required by
the RAP Designer shall be performed on selected production RAP elements to compare results
with the modulus test pier.
3.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Independent Engineering Testing Agency (Owner’s Quality Assurance): The RAP Installer shall
provide full-time Quality Control monitoring of RAP construction activities. The Owner is
responsible for retaining an independent engineering testing firm to provide Quality Assurance
services.
B. Responsibilities of the Independent Engineering Testing Agency:
1. The Testing Agency shall monitor the modulus test pier installation and testing. The
Installer shall provide and install all dial indicators and other measuring devices.
2. The Testing Agency shall monitor the installation of RAP elements to verify that the
production installation practices are similar to those used during the installation of the
modulus test elements.
3. The Testing Agency shall report any discrepancies to the Installer and General
Contractor immediately.
4. The Testing Agency shall observe the excavation, compaction and placement of the
foundations as described below. Dynamic Cone Penetration testing may be performed to
evaluate the footing bottom condition as determined by the Testing Agency.
C. Responsibilities of the General Contractor:
1. Site Preparation and Protection:
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
12043 316225 - 6
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN RAMMED AGGREGATE PIERS
a. The General Contractor shall locate and protect underground and above ground
utilities and other structures from damage during installation of the RAP elements.
b. Site grades for RAP installation shall be within 1 foot of the top of footing elevation or
finished grade elevation to minimize RAP installation depths. Ground elevations and
bottom of footing elevations shall be provided to the RAP Installer in sufficient detail
to estimate installation depth elevations to within 3 inches.
c. The General Contractor will provide site access to the Installer, after earthwork in the
area has been completed. A working surface shall be established and maintained by
the General Contractor to provide wet weather protection of the subgrade and to
provide access for efficient operation of the RAP installation.
d. Prior to, during and following RAP installation, the General Contractor shall provide
positive drainage to protect the site from wet weather and surface ponding of water.
e. If spoils are generated by RAP installation, spoil removal from the RAP work area in
a timely manner to prevent interruption of RAP installation is required.
2. RAP Layout: The location of RAP-supported foundations for this project, including layout
of individual RAP elements, shall be marked in the field using survey stakes or similar
means at locations shown on the drawings.
3. Excavations of Obstructions:
a. Should any obstruction be encountered during RAP installation, the General
Contractor shall be responsible for promptly removing such obstruction, or the pier
shall be relocated or abandoned. Obstructions include, but are not limited to,
boulders, timbers, concrete, bricks, utility lines, etc., which shall prevent placing the
piers to the required depth, or shall cause the pier to drift from the required location.
b. Dense natural rock or weathered rock layers shall not be deemed obstructions, and
piers may be terminated short of design lengths on such materials.
4. Utility Excavations: The General Contractor shall coordinate all excavations made
subsequent to RAP installation so that excavations do not encroach on the piers as
shown in the RAP construction drawings. Protection of completed RAP elements is the
responsibility of the General Contractor. In the event that utility excavations are required
in close proximity to the installed RAP elements, the General Contractor shall contact the
RAP Designer immediately to develop construction solutions to minimize impacts on the
installed RAP elements.
5. Footing Bottoms:
a. Excavation and surface compaction of all footings shall be the responsibility of the
General Contractor.
b. Foundation excavations to expose the tops of RAP elements shall be made in a
workman-like manner, and shall be protected until concrete placement, with
procedures and equipment best suited to (1) avoid exposure to water, (2) prevent
softening of the matrix soil between and around the RAP elements before pouring
structural concrete, and (3) achieve direct and firm contact between the dense,
undisturbed RAP elements and the concrete footing.
c. All excavations for footing bottoms supporting RAP foundations shall be prepared in
the following manner by the General Contractor. Recommended procedures for
achieving these goals are to:
1. Limit over-excavation below the bottom of the footing to 3 inches (including
disturbance from the teeth of the excavation equipment).
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
12043 316225 - 7
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN RAMMED AGGREGATE PIERS
2. Compaction of surface soil and top of RAP elements shall be prepared using a
motorized impact compactor (“Wacker Packer,” “Jumping Jack,” or similar).
Sled-type tamping devices shall only be used in granular soils and when
approved by the Designer. Loose or soft surficial soil over the entire footing
bottom shall be recompacted or removed, respectively. The surface of the
aggregate pier shall be recompacted prior to completing footing bottom
preparation.
3. Place footing concrete immediately after footing excavation is made and
approved, preferably the same day as the excavation. Footing concrete must be
placed on the same day if the footing is bearing in moisture-sensitive soils. If
same day placement of footing concrete is not possible, open excavations shall
be protected from surface water accumulation. A lean concrete mud-mat may be
used to accomplish this. Other methods must be pre-approved by the Designer.
d. The following criteria shall apply, and a written inspection report sealed by the project
Testing Agency shall be furnished to the Installer to confirm:
1. That water (which may soften the unconfined matrix soil between and around the
RAP elements, and may have detrimental effects on the supporting capability of
the RAP reinforced subgrade) has not been allowed to pond in the footing
excavation at any time.
2. That all RAP elements designed for each footing have been exposed in the
footing excavation.
3. That immediately before footing construction, the tops of RAP elements exposed
in each footing excavation have been inspected and recompacted as necessary
with mechanical compaction equipment.
4. That no excavations or drilled shafts (elevator piston, etc.) have been made after
installation of RAP elements within the excavation limits described in the RAP
construction drawings, without the written approval of the Installer or Designer.
e. Failure to provide the above inspection and certification by the Testing Agency, which
is beyond the responsibility of the RAP Installer, may void any written or implied
warranty on the performance of the RAP system.
3.6 PAYMENT
A. Method of Measurement:
1. Measurement of the aggregate piers is on a lump sum basis.
2. Payment shall cover design, supply, and installation of the aggregate pier foundation
system. Excavation of unsuitable materials, delays, re-engineering, and remobilization
as documented and approved by the Owner, or Architect, shall be paid for under
separate pay items.
B. Basis of Payment:
1. The accepted quantities of piers will be paid per approved, in-place aggregate pier.
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item: Pay Unit:
Preparation of plans & specs, and installation of RAP elements $_____ Lump Sum
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
12043 316225 - 8
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN RAMMED AGGREGATE PIERS
2. Unit Prices shall be provided to account for:
Additional Installed Piers (without remobilization) $_____ Each
Add for Casing Holes $_____ / Linear Ft.
Additional Mobilizations $_____ Each
Additional Modulus or Uplift Load Tests $_____ Each
END OF SECTION 31 6225
12043 32 12 16 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ASPHALT PAVING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
SECTION 32 12 16 - ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Cold milling of existing asphalt pavement.
2. Hot-mix asphalt patching.
3. Hot-mix asphalt paving.
4. Hot-mix asphalt overlay.
5. Asphalt surface treatments.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for subgrade preparation, fill material, unbound-
aggregate subbase and base courses, and aggregate pavement shoulders.
2. Section 321373 "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants" for joint sealants and fillers at
pavement terminations.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review methods and procedures related to hot-mix asphalt paving including, but not
limited to, the following:
a. Review proposed sources of paving materials, including capabilities and location of
plant that will manufacture hot-mix asphalt.
b. Review requirements for protecting paving work, including restriction of traffic
during installation period and for remainder of construction period.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties.
2. Job-Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each job
mix proposed for the Work.
3. Job-Mix Designs: For each job mix proposed for the Work.
12043 32 12 16 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ASPHALT PAVING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and testing agency.
B. Material Certificates: For each paving material. Include statement that mixes containing
recycled materials will perform equal to mixes produced from all new materials.
C. Material Test Reports: For each paving material, by a qualified testing agency.
D. Field quality-control reports.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A paving-mix manufacturer registered with and approved by the
Indiana Department of Transportation.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM D 3666 for testing indicated.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable
requirements of the Indiana Department of Transportation for asphalt paving work.
1. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in
standard specifications do not apply to this Section.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively
damp, if rain is imminent or expected before time required for adequate cure, or if the following
conditions are not met:
1. Tack Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.6 deg C).
2. Slurry Coat: Comply with weather limitations in ASTM D 3910.
3. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and rising
at time of placement.
4. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.6 deg C) at time
of placement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 AGGREGATES
A. General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous
installations.
B. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM D 692/D 692M, sound; angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or
cured, crushed blast-furnace slag.
C. Fine Aggregate: ASTM D 1073 or AASHTO M 29, sharp-edged natural sand or sand prepared
from stone, gravel, cured blast-furnace slag, or combinations thereof.
12043 32 12 16 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ASPHALT PAVING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
1. For hot-mix asphalt, limit natural sand to a maximum of 20 percent by weight of the total
aggregate mass.
D. Mineral Filler: ASTM D 242/D 242M or AASHTO M 17, rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or
other inert material and per INDOT Standard Specifications, latest edition.
E. All angular crushed aggregate must meet the requirements of the INDOT Standard
Specifications, latest edition.
2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS
A. Asphalt Binder: AASHTO M 320, PG 64-22.
B. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 3381/D 3381M for viscosity-graded material and
ASTM D 946/D 946M for penetration-graded material. The bitumen mixture for all asphalt
mixes shall be as specified in the INDOT Standard Specifications, latest edition.
C. Tack Coat: Cut-back asphalt or asphalt emulsion per Section 409 of the INDOT Standard
Specifications, latest edition.
D. Water: Potable.
E. Undersealing Asphalt: ASTM D 3141/D 3141M; pumping consistency.
2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Recycled Materials for Hot-Mix Asphalt Mixes: Reclaimed asphalt pavement; reclaimed,
unbound-aggregate base material; and recycled asphalt shingles from sources and gradations
that have performed satisfactorily in previous installations, equal to performance of required hot-
mix asphalt paving produced from all new materials.
B. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by the EPA, and not classified as
"restricted use" for locations and conditions of application. Provide in granular, liquid, or
wettable powder form.
C. Sand: ASTM D 1073 or AASHTO M 29, Grade No. 2 or No. 3.
D. Paving Geotextile: AASHTO M 288 paving fabric; nonwoven polypropylene; resistant to
chemical attack, rot, and mildew; and specifically designed for paving applications.
E. Joint Sealant: ASTM D 6690 or AASHTO M 324, Type I, hot-applied, single-component,
polymer-modified bituminous sealant.
2.4 MIXES
A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense-graded, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes per INDOT Standard
Specifications and complying with the following requirements:
1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where
Project is located.
2. Base Course: Course Aggregate No. 8
3. Surface Course: Course Aggregate Size 11, Class B
12043 32 12 16 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ASPHALT PAVING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to begin paving.
B. Proof-roll subgrade below pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft
pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.
1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in direction
perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h).
2. Proof roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons
(13.6 tonnes).
3. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as
determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.
C. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 COLD MILLING
A. Clean existing pavement surface of loose and deleterious material immediately before cold
milling. Remove existing asphalt pavement by cold milling to grades and cross sections
indicated.
1. Mill to a depth of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).
2. Mill to a uniform finished surface free of excessive gouges, grooves, and ridges.
3. Control rate of milling to prevent tearing of existing asphalt course.
4. Repair or replace curbs, manholes, and other construction damaged during cold milling.
5. Excavate and trim unbound-aggregate base course, if encountered, and keep material
separate from milled hot-mix asphalt.
6. Patch surface depressions deeper than 1 inch (25 mm) after milling, before wearing
course is laid.
7. Handle milled asphalt material according to approved waste management plan required
in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
8. Keep milled pavement surface free of loose material and dust.
9. Do not allow milled materials to accumulate on-site.
3.3 PATCHING
A. Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to
sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches (300 mm) into
perimeter of adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces
vertically. Remove excavated material. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course
to form new subgrade.
B. Tack Coat: Before placing patch material, apply tack coat uniformly to vertical asphalt surfaces
abutting the patch. Apply at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.7 L/sq. m).
1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving.
2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.
Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.
12043 32 12 16 - 5
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ASPHALT PAVING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
C. Placing Patch Material: Fill excavated pavement areas with hot-mix asphalt base mix for full
thickness of patch and, while still hot, compact flush with adjacent surface.
D. Placing Patch Material: Partially fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix and,
while still hot, compact. Cover asphalt base course with compacted, hot-mix surface layer
finished flush with adjacent surfaces.
3.4 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material
from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving.
B. Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates and
written application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared subgrade or surface of compacted-
aggregate base before applying paving materials.
1. Mix herbicide with prime coat if formulated by manufacturer for that purpose.
C. Cutback Prime Coat: Apply uniformly over surface of compacted unbound-aggregate base
course at a rate of 0.15 to 0.50 gal./sq. yd. (0.7 to 2.3 L/sq. m). Apply enough material to
penetrate and seal, but not flood, surface. Allow prime coat to cure.
1. If prime coat is not entirely absorbed within 24 hours after application, spread sand over
surface to blot excess asphalt. Use enough sand to prevent pickup under traffic.
Remove loose sand by sweeping before pavement is placed and after volatiles have
evaporated.
2. Protect primed substrate from damage until ready to receive paving.
D. Emulsified Asphalt Prime Coat: Apply uniformly over surface of compacted unbound-aggregate
base course at a rate of 0.10 to 0.30 gal./sq. yd. per inch depth (0.5 to 1.40 L/sq. m per 25 mm
depth). Apply enough material to penetrate and seal, but not flood, surface. Allow prime coat to
cure.
1. If prime coat is not entirely absorbed within 24 hours after application, spread sand over
surface to blot excess asphalt. Use enough sand to prevent pickup under traffic.
Remove loose sand by sweeping before pavement is placed and after volatiles have
evaporated.
2. Protect primed substrate from damage until ready to receive paving.
E. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq.
yd. (0.2 to 0.7 L/sq. m).
1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving.
2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.
Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.
3.5 PLACING HOT-MIX ASPHALT
A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place
asphalt mix by hand in areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation
of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted.
1. Place hot-mix asphalt base course in number of lifts and thicknesses indicated.
12043 32 12 16 - 6
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ASPHALT PAVING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
2. Place hot-mix asphalt surface course in single lift.
3. Spread mix at a minimum temperature of 250 deg F (121 deg C).
4. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side of
one-way slopes unless otherwise indicated.
5. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and
tears in asphalt-paving mat.
B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet (3 m) wide unless infill edge strips of a
lesser width are required.
1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to
overlap previous strips. Overlap mix placement about 1 to 1-1/2 inches (25 to 38 mm)
from strip to strip to ensure proper compaction of mix along longitudinal joints.
2. Complete a section of asphalt base course before placing asphalt surface course.
C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools
to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent
segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.
3.6 JOINTS
A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct
joints free of depressions, with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix
asphalt course.
1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints.
2. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).
3. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm).
4. Construct transverse joints at each point where paver ends a day's work and resumes
work at a subsequent time. Construct these joints using either "bulkhead" or "papered"
method according to AI MS-22, for both "Ending a Lane" and "Resumption of Paving
Operations."
5. Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive
displacement.
6. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density.
3.7 COMPACTION
A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without
excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or with vibratory-plate
compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.
1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F (85 deg C).
B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and
outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade,
and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements.
C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot-
mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix
asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density:
12043 32 12 16 - 7
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ASPHALT PAVING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
1. Average Density: 96 percent of reference laboratory density according to ASTM D 6927
or AASHTO T 245, but not less than 94 percent or greater than 100 percent.
2. Average Density: 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density according to
ASTM D 2041, but not less than 90 percent or greater than 96 percent.
D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still
warm.
E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to
proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly.
F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and
replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface
smoothness.
G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and
hardened.
H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become
marked.
3.8 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Pavement Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the
following tolerances:
1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus.
B. Pavement Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness
within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge applied
transversely or longitudinally to paved areas:
1. Base Course: 1/4 inch (6 mm)
2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch (3 mm)
3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown.
Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch (6 mm).
3.9 SURFACE TREATMENTS
A. Slurry Seals: Apply slurry coat in a uniform thickness according to ASTM D 3910 and allow to
cure.
1. Roll slurry seal to remove ridges and provide a uniform, smooth surface.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Contractor to engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and
inspections.
B. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined
according to ASTM D 3549.
12043 32 12 16 - 8
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN ASPHALT PAVING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
C. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for
compliance with smoothness tolerances.
D. In-Place Density: Testing agency will take samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and
compacted pavement according to ASTM D 979 or AASHTO T 168.
1. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results from four
samples of hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared according to
ASTM D 2041, and compacted according to job-mix specifications.
2. In-place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samples
according to ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.
a. One core sample will be taken for every 1000 sq. yd. (836 sq. m) or less of
installed pavement, with no fewer than three cores taken.
b. Field density of in-place compacted pavement may also be determined by nuclear
method according to ASTM D 2950 and correlated with ASTM D 1188 or
ASTM D 2726.
E. Replace and compact hot-mix asphalt where core tests were taken.
F. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements
indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.
3.11 WASTE HANDLING
A. General: Handle asphalt-paving waste according to approved waste management plan
required in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
END OF SECTION 32 12 16
12043 32 13 13 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CONCRETE PAVING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
SECTION 32 13 13 - CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Driveways.
2. Roadways.
3. Parking lots.
4. Curbs and gutters.
5. Walks.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Other Action Submittals:
1. Design Mixtures: For each concrete paving mixture. Include alternate design mixtures
when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other
circumstances warrant adjustments.
2. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on
comprehensive testing of current materials.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-
mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production
facilities and equipment.
B. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) unless otherwise indicated.
C. Handicap Standards: Provide ramps indicated for handicap access in accordance with ANSI
A117 and Federal Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled
content not less than 25 percent.
12043 32 13 13 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CONCRETE PAVING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, fabricated from as-drawn steel
wire into flat sheets.
C. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet.
D. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420); deformed.
E. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, as drawn.
F. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 496/A 496M.
G. Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420) plain-steel bars; zinc coated
(galvanized) after fabrication according to ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class I coating. Cut bars true
to length with ends square and free of burrs.
H. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and
fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar
supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast
concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete specified.
2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and
source throughout Project:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, portland cement Type I.
a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or Class F.
b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33,uniformly graded, and as follows:
1. Combined Aggregate Gradation: Well graded from coarsest to finest with not more than
18 percent and not less than 8 percent retained on a individual sieve, expect that less
than 8 percent may be retained on coarsest sieve and on No. 50 sieve, and less than 8
percent may be retained on sieves finer than No. 50.
2. Use crushed limestone coarse aggregate for concrete exposed to weather.
C. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M.
D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
E. Chemical Admixtures: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of
cementitious material.
F. Note: Where Class A, B, or C concrete is reference in plans or specifications, the class is as
defined in ACI 347-04.
12043 32 13 13 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CONCRETE PAVING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
2.3 CURING MATERIALS
A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 3, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) dry.
B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
C. Water: Potable.
D. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular, film forming, manufactured for application
to fresh concrete.
E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,
dissipating.
F. White, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 2, Class B,
dissipating.
2.4 FIBER REINFORCEMENT
A. Fibrous Reinforcement: Collated, fibrillated, polypropylene fibers or 100% virgin nylon
filamentized fibers for secondary reinforcement of concrete, ASTM C 116, Type III.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Forta CFP; Forta Corporation.
b. Fibermesh; FIbermesh, Div. of Synthetic Technologies.
c. Fiberstrand 100; Euclid Chemical Co.
d. Grace Fibers; W.R. Grace & Co., Construction Products Division.
e. Nycon, Inc.
2.5 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Joint Fillers: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-
expanding cork in preformed strips.
A. Penetrating Anti-Spalling Sealer: The sealer shall be a silane water based compound which
has a 96% chloride-ion screen and a repellency factor of 92% when tested in accordance with
NCHRP #244, Test Method. In addition, the sealer-treated concrete must exhibit no scaling
when exposed to 120 cycles of freezing-and-thawing in accordance with ASTM C 672.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. "Weather Worker Heavy-Duty WB (J-27 WB)"; Dayton Superior Corp.
b. "Enviroseal 20"; Hydrozo Incorp.
c. "Pentane WB"; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
2.6 PAVEMENT MARKINGS
A. Pavement-Marking Paint: Latex, waterborne emulsion, lead and chromate free, ready mixed,
complying with FS TT-P-1952, Type II, with drying time of less than 45 minutes.
12043 32 13 13 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CONCRETE PAVING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
1. Color: As Indicated on Drawings.
2.7 WHEEL STOPS
A. Wheel Stops: Precast, air-entrained concrete.
1. Color: Gray.
2. Dowels: Galvanized steel, 3/4 inch in diameter, 10-inch minimum length or as otherwise
indicated on Drawings.
3. Adhesive: As recommended by wheel stop manufacturer for application to concrete
pavement.
2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M), with the following
properties:
1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi (27.6 MPa).
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45.
3. Slump Limit: 5 inches (125 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
4. Air Content: 6.5 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent.
B. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2.9 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete paving to identify soft pockets and areas of
excess yielding.
B. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.
3.2 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION
A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to required
lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms
can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.
B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from
concrete without damage.
12043 32 13 13 - 5
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CONCRETE PAVING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and
supporting reinforcement.
3.4 JOINTS
A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edges true to line, with
faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to
centerline unless otherwise indicated.
B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at
locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless paving
terminates at isolation joints.
C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs,
catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, other fixed objects, and where indicated.
D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as
indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete
thickness.
E. Edging: After initial floating, tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete with an
edging tool to a 1/4-inch (6-mm) radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes.
Eliminate edging-tool marks on concrete surfaces.
3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed.
B. Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, placing, and
consolidating concrete.
C. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push
or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.
D. Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off.
E. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open-textured and uniform
surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further
disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.
3.6 FLOAT FINISHING
A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.
B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and
concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven
floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true
planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular
texture.
12043 32 13 13 - 6
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CONCRETE PAVING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
1. Medium Broom Finish: Draw a soft-bristle broom across float-finished concrete surface
perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.
3.7 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures.
B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection.
C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy
conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing
operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and
bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing.
D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete
surface.
E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing
compound, or a combination of these.
F. Penetrating, Anti-Spalling Sealer Treatment: Apply compounds to clean, dry concrete surfaces
free of oil, dirt, and other foreign material according to manufacturer's specifications. Sealer to
be applied to all exterior concrete paving and curbs after concrete has cured 28 days.
3.8 PAVING TOLERANCES
A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 and as follows:
1. Elevation: 3/4 inch (19 mm).
2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch (10 mm), minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- (3-m-) long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/2 inch
(13 mm).
4. Joint Spacing: 3 inches (75 mm).
5. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus.
6. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch (3 mm), no minus.
3.9 PAVEMENT MARKING
A. Allow concrete paving to cure for a minimum of 28 days and be dry before starting pavement
marking.
B. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.
C. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce markings of dimensions indicated with
uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet
film thickness of 15 mils (0.4 mm).
12043 32 13 13 - 7
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CONCRETE PAVING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
3.10 WHEEL STOPS
A. Install wheel stops in bed of adhesive applied as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Securely attach wheel stops to paving with not less than two galvanized-steel dowels located at
one-quarter to one-third points. Install dowels in drilled holes in the paving and bond dowels to
wheel stop. Recess head of dowel beneath top of wheel stop.
3.11 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not
comply with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint to joint
unless otherwise approved by Architect.
B. Protect concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after
placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by
removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.
C. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep
paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.
END OF SECTION 32 13 13
12043 32 13 73 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
SECTION 32 13 73 - CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Cold-applied joint sealants.
2. Hot-applied joint sealants.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 321216 "Asphalt Paving" for constructing joints between concrete and asphalt
pavement.
2. Section 321313 "Concrete Paving" for constructing joints in concrete pavement.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for installation of units required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant from single source from single
manufacturer.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-
sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C).
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed
from joint substrates.
12043 32 13 73 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on testing and field
experience.
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.
2.2 COLD-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS
A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Silicone Joint Sealant for Concrete: ASTM D 5893, Type NS.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Crafco Inc., an ERGON company; RoadSaver Silicone.
b. Dow Corning Corporation; 888.
c. Pecora Corporation; 301 NS.
B. Single-Component, Self-Leveling, Silicone Joint Sealant for Concrete: ASTM D 5893, Type SL.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Crafco Inc., an ERGON company; RoadSaver Silicone SL.
b. Dow Corning Corporation; 890-SL.
c. Pecora Corporation; 300 SL.
C. Multicomponent, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant for Concrete: ASTM C 920,
Type M, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-200.
2.3 HOT-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS
A. Hot-Applied, Single-Component Joint Sealant for Concrete: ASTM D 3406.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Crafco Inc., an ERGON company; Superseal 444/777.
B. Hot-Applied, Single-Component Joint Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt: ASTM D 6690,
Types I, II, and III.
12043 32 13 73 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Sealtight Hi-Spec or Sealtight 3405.
b. Right Pointe; D-3405 Hot Applied Sealant.
2.4 JOINT-SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS
A. General: Provide joint-sealant backer materials that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint
substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated
by joint-sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Round Backer Rods for Cold- and Hot-Applied Joint Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 1, of
diameter and density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of
sealant.
C. Round Backer Rods for Cold-Applied Joint Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 3, of diameter and
density required to control joint-sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant.
D. Backer Strips for Cold- and Hot-Applied Joint Sealants: ASTM D 5249; Type 2; of thickness
and width required to control joint-sealant depth, prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant, and
fill remainder of joint opening under sealant.
2.5 PRIMERS
A. Primers: Product recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests and field tests.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-
sealant performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by joint-
sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior
experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining
surfaces.
12043 32 13 73 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Joint-Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of
joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Install joint-sealant backings of kind indicated to support joint sealants during application and at
position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to
joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint-sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint-sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent joint-sealant backings that have become wet before sealant
application and replace them with dry materials.
D. Install joint sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same
time backings are installed:
1. Place joint sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
E. Tooling of Non-sag Joint Sealants: Immediately after joint-sealant application and before
skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to the following requirements to form smooth,
uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and
adhesion of sealant with sides of joint:
1. Remove excess joint sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer and that do
not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
F. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions unless
otherwise indicated.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess joint sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses, by
methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and
of products in which joints occur.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants, during and after curing period, from contact with contaminating
substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so
sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such
protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint
sealants immediately and replace with joint sealant so installations in repaired areas are
indistinguishable from the original work.
12043 32 13 73 - 5
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
3.6 PAVEMENT-JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Joint-Sealant Application: Joints within cement concrete pavement.
1. Joint Location:
a. Expansion and isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete pavement.
b. Contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
c. Other joints as indicated.
2. Silicone Joint Sealant for Concrete: Single component, non-sag or Single component,
self-leveling.
3. Urethane Joint Sealant for Concrete: Multi-component, pourable, traffic-grade
4. Hot-Applied Joint Sealant for Concrete: Single component.
5. Joint-Sealant Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.
B. Joint-Sealant Application: Joints between cement concrete and asphalt pavement.
1. Joint Location:
a. Joints between concrete and asphalt pavement.
b. Joints between concrete curbs and asphalt pavement.
c. Other joints as indicated.
2. Hot-Applied Joint Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt: Single component.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.
END OF SECTION 32 13 73
12043 33 05 00 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
SECTION 33 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Piping joining materials.
2. Transition fittings.
3. Dielectric fittings.
4. Sleeves.
5. Identification devices.
6. Grout.
7. Flowable fill.
8. Piped utility demolition.
9. Piping system common requirements.
10. Equipment installation common requirements.
11. Painting.
12. Concrete bases.
13. Metal supports and anchorages.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures
and weather conditions.
B. Concealed Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and
physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples
include installations within unheated shelters.
C. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
D. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
E. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Dielectric fittings.
12043 33 05 00 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
2. Identification devices.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B. Steel Piping Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
C. Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of
identification devices.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place
concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting if devices
are applied to surfaces.
C. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Formwork, reinforcement, and concrete
requirements are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete.".
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness,
unless otherwise indicated.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
12043 33 05 00 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated; and
full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty
brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping,
unless otherwise indicated.
F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for
wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
G. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:
1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.
2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.
H. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.
2.2 TRANSITION FITTINGS
A. Transition Fittings, General: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with
ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
B. Transition Couplings NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller:
1. Underground Piping: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.
2. Aboveground Piping: Specified piping system fitting.
C. AWWA Transition Couplings NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.
b. Dresser, Inc.; DMD Div.
c. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The); Pipe Products Div.
d. JCM Industries.
e. Smith-Blair, Inc.
f. Viking Johnson.
2. Description: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling for underground pressure piping.
D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings:
12043 33 05 00 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Spears Manufacturing Co.
b. NIBCO INC.
c. Colonial Engineering, Inc.
2. Description: CPVC and PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80
equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint
or threaded end.
E. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Colonial Engineering, Inc.
b. NIBCO INC.
c. Spears Manufacturing Co.
3. Description: MSS SP-107, CPVC and PVC four-part union. Include brass or stainless-
steel threaded end, solvent-cement-joint or threaded plastic end, rubber O-ring, and
union nut.
F. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.
b. Fernco, Inc.
c. Mission Rubber Company.
d. Plastic Oddities.
3. Description: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be
joined, and corrosion-resistant metal band on each end.
2.3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Dielectric Fittings, General: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material
body with separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and
temperature.
B. Dielectric Unions:
12043 33 05 00 - 5
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.
b. Central Plastics Company.
c. Epco Sales, Inc.
d. Hart Industries, International, Inc.
e. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
3. Description: Factory fabricated, union, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum at 180 deg F (82 deg C).
b. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded
ferrous.
C. Dielectric Flanges:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.
b. Central Plastics Company.
c. Epco Sales, Inc.
d. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
3. Description: Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly, NPS 2-1/2 to
NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100) and larger.
a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum.
b. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-
joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
D. Dielectric-Flange Kits:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Calpico, Inc.
c. Central Plastics Company.
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
3. Description: Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges, NPS 2-
1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
12043 33 05 00 - 6
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum.
b. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.
c. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.
d. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.
E. Dielectric Couplings:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Calpico, Inc.
b. Lochinvar Corporation.
3. Description: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining,
NPS 3 (DN 80) and smaller.
a. Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) at 225 deg F (107 deg C).
b. End Connections: Threaded.
F. Dielectric Nipples:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Perfection Corporation.
b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
c. Victaulic Company.
3. Description: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining.
a. Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) at 225 deg F (107 deg C).
b. End Connections: Threaded or grooved.
2.4 SLEEVES
A. Mechanical sleeve seals for pipe penetrations are specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and
Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed
with welded longitudinal joint.
C. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
D. Cast-Iron Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with
plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Molded PVC Sleeves: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
12043 33 05 00 - 7
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
F. PVC Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
G. Molded PE Sleeves: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing
flange for attaching to wooden forms.
2.5 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. General: Products specified are for applications referenced in other utilities Sections. If more
than single type is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's option.
B. Equipment Nameplates: Metal permanently fastened to equipment with data engraved or
stamped.
1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating
and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and essential data.
2. Location: Accessible and visible.
C. Stencils: Standard stencils prepared with letter sizes complying with recommendations in
ASME A13.1. Minimum letter height is 1-1/4 inches (30 mm) for ducts, and 3/4 inch (20 mm) for
access door signs and similar operational instructions.
1. Material: Fiberboard.
2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, oil-based, alkyd-gloss black enamel, unless otherwise indicated.
Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.
3. Identification Paint: Exterior, oil-based, alkyd enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1,
unless otherwise indicated.
D. Snap-on Plastic Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, semirigid, snap-on type.
Include color-coding according to ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Pressure-Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, color-coded, pressure-
sensitive-vinyl type with permanent adhesive.
F. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches (150 mm): Full-band pipe markers,
extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location.
G. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches (150 mm) and Larger: Either full-band or strip-
type pipe markers, at least three times letter height and of length required for label.
H. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard preprinted captions as selected by Architect.
I. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each
application length.
1. Arrows: Either integrally with piping system service lettering to accommodate both
directions of flow, or as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.
J. Plastic Tape: Manufacturer's standard color-coded, pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive vinyl
tape, at least 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick.
1. Width: 1-1/2 inches (40 mm) on pipes with OD, including insulation, less than 6 inches
(150 mm); 2-1/2 inches (65 mm) for larger pipes.
2. Color: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
12043 33 05 00 - 8
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
K. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters for piping system abbreviation
and 1/2-inch (13-mm) sequenced numbers. Include 5/32-inch (4-mm) hole for fastener.
1. Material: 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick, polished brass or aluminum.
2. Material: 0.0375-inch- (1-mm-) thick stainless steel.
3. Material: 3/32-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick plastic laminate with 2 black surfaces and a white
inner layer.
4. Material: Valve manufacturer's standard solid plastic.
5. Size: 1-1/2 inches (40 mm) in diameter, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Shape: As indicated for each piping system.
L. Valve Tag Fasteners: Brass, wire-link or beaded chain; or brass S-hooks.
M. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resin-
laminate engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine
subcore, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide holes
for mechanical fastening.
1. Engraving: Engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match equipment
identification.
2. Thickness: 1/8 inch (3 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
3. Thickness: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), for units up to 20 sq. in. (130 sq. cm) or 8 inches (200
mm) in length, and 1/8 inch (3 mm) for larger units.
4. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type permanent adhesive.
N. Plastic Equipment Markers: Manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, in the following color
codes:
1. Green: Cooling equipment and components.
2. Yellow: Heating equipment and components.
3. Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components.
4. Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet criteria above.
5. Hazardous Equipment: Use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1.
6. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible. Include the following:
a. Name and plan number.
b. Equipment service.
c. Design capacity.
d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions,
and speed.
7. Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches (65 by 100 mm) for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2
by 6 inches (115 by 150 mm) for equipment.
O. Plasticized Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card
stock with mat finish suitable for writing.
1. Size: 3-1/4 by 5-5/8 inches (83 by 143 mm).
2. Fasteners: Brass grommets and wire.
3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or DO NOT
OPERATE.
P. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in
piped utility identification with corresponding designations indicated. Use numbers, letters, and
12043 33 05 00 - 9
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
terms indicated for proper identification, operation, and maintenance of piped utility systems and
equipment.
1. Multiple Systems: Identify individual system number and service if multiple systems of
same name are indicated.
2.6 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post hardening, volume adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
2.7 FLOWABLE FILL
A. Description: Low-strength-concrete, flowable-slurry mix.
1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, portland.
2. Density: 115- to 145-lb/cu. ft. (1840- to 2325-kg/cu. m).
3. Aggregates: ASTM C 33, natural sand, fine and crushed gravel or stone, coarse.
4. Aggregates: ASTM C 33, natural sand, fine.
5. Admixture: ASTM C 618, fly-ash mineral.
6. Water: Comply with ASTM C 94/C 94M.
7. Strength: 100 to 200 psig (690 to 1380 kPa) at 28 days.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPED UTILITY DEMOLITION
A. Refer to Section 024119 "Selective Structure Demolition" for general demolition requirements
and procedures.
B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove piped utility systems, equipment, and components indicated
to be removed.
1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or
plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping. Fill abandoned piping with flowable fill,
and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material.
3. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
4. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,
clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make
operational.
5. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove
equipment and deliver to Owner.
C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable,
remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity
and quality.
12043 33 05 00 - 10
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
3.2 DIELECTRIC FITTING APPLICATIONS
A. Dry Piping Systems: Connect piping of dissimilar metals with the following:
1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Dielectric unions.
2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12 (DN 65 to DN 300): Dielectric flanges or dielectric flange kits.
B. Wet Piping Systems: Connect piping of dissimilar metals with the following:
1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Dielectric couplings or dielectric nipples.
2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Dielectric nipples.
3. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 65 to DN 200): Dielectric nipples or dielectric flange kits.
4. NPS 10 and NPS 12 (DN 250 and DN 300): Dielectric flange kits.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and utilities Sections specifying piping
systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated
unless deviations to layout are approved on the Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
D. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
E. Install piping at indicated slopes.
F. Install piping free of sags and bends.
G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
H. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
I. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
J. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
K. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and
roof slabs.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of equipment areas or other wet
areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.
2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
a. PVC Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150).
12043 33 05 00 - 11
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger, penetrating gypsum-
board partitions.
L. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
M. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections for roughing-in requirements.
3.4 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and utilities Sections specifying
piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
E. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes
and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
G. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with grooved-end pipe coupling with coupling housing, gasket,
lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
H. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813 water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-
free solder alloy (0.20 percent maximum lead content) complying with ASTM B 32.
I. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
J. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Assemble joints for plain-end copper tube and mechanical pressure
seal fitting with proprietary crimping tool to according to fitting manufacturer's written
instructions.
K. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 appendixes.
3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
12043 33 05 00 - 12
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket
fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and
socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138 Appendix.
L. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
M. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
N. Plastic Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or
paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1. Plain-End PE Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.
2. Plain-End PE Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
O. Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe
manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at
final connection to each piece of equipment.
3. Install dielectric fittings at connections of dissimilar metal pipes.
3.6 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment level and plumb, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components.
Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other
installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location.
C. Install equipment to allow right of way to piping systems installed at required slope.
3.7 PAINTING
A. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and
procedures to match original factory finish.
3.8 IDENTIFICATION
A. Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction
of flow.
1. Stenciled Markers: According to ASME A13.1.
12043 33 05 00 - 13
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
2. Plastic markers, with application systems. Install on insulation segment if required for hot
noninsulated piping.
3. Locate pipe markers on exposed piping according to the following:
a. Near each valve and control device.
b. Near each branch, excluding short takeoffs for equipment and terminal units. Mark
each pipe at branch if flow pattern is not obvious.
c. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors or enter inaccessible
enclosures.
d. At manholes and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.
e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
B. Equipment: Install engraved plastic-laminate sign or equipment marker on or near each major
item of equipment.
1. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) high for name of unit if viewing distance is
less than 24 inches (610 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) high for distances up to 72 inches (1800
mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary
lettering two-thirds to three-fourths of size of principal lettering.
2. Text of Signs: Provide name of identified unit. Include text to distinguish among multiple
units, inform user of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency
precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.
C. Adjusting: Relocate identifying devices that become visually blocked by work of this or other
Divisions.
3.9 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's
written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.
1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm)
larger in both directions than supported unit.
2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of
base.
3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete
base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
7. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa) , 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as
specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
3.10 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Refer to Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor piped utility materials and equipment.
12043 33 05 00 - 14
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
3.11 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base
plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.
END OF SECTION 33 05 00
12043 33 11 00 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
SECTION 33 11 00 – FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. All water line installation shall be performed in accordance with City of Carmel Utilities
specifications, latest edition. These documents can be found at
http://carmelutilities.com/specifications.html
END OF SECTION 33 11 00
12043 33 31 00 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS
SECTION 33 31 00 – FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. All sanitary sewer installation shall be performed in accordance with City of Carmel Utilities
specifications, latest edition. These documents can be found at
http://carmelutilities.com/sewerspecifications.html
END OF SECTION 33 31 00
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
12043 33 41 00 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
SECTION 33 41 00 - STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pipe and fittings.
2. Pressure pipe couplings
3. Stormwater force main piping
4. Manholes.
5. Cleanouts.
6. Nonpressure transition couplings.
7. Catch basins.
8. Stormwater inlets.
9. Pipe outlets.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Manholes: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, frames, and covers.
2. Catch basins and stormwater inlets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, frames,
covers, and grates.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Storm Drainage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied
by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after
arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Architect's written permission.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PE PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Corrugated PE Drainage Pipe and Fittings NPS 3 to NPS 10 (DN 80 to DN 250):
AASHTO M 252M, Type S, with smooth waterway for coupling joints.
12043 33 41 00 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
1. Silttight Couplings: PE sleeve with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 2 gasket
material that mates with tube and fittings.
2. Soiltight Couplings: AASHTO M 252M, corrugated, matching tube and fittings.
B. Corrugated PE Pipe and Fittings NPS 12 to NPS 60 (DN 300 to DN 1500): AASHTO M 294M,
Type S, with smooth waterway for coupling joints.
1. Silttight Couplings: PE sleeve with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 2 gasket
material that mates with pipe and fittings.
2. Soiltight Couplings: AASHTO M 294M, corrugated, matching pipe and fittings.
2.2 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. PVC Corrugated Sewer Piping:
1. Pipe: ASTM F 949, PVC, corrugated pipe with bell-and-spigot ends for gasketed joints.
2. Fittings: ASTM F 949, PVC molded or fabricated, socket type.
3. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.
B. PVC Pressure Piping
1. Pipe: AWWA C900, Class 200 PVC pipe with bell and spigot ends for gasketed joints
2. Fittings: AWWA C900 Class 200 PVC pipe with bell ends
3. Gaskets: ASTM 477, elastomeric seals
2.3 CONCRETE PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Reinforced-Concrete Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 76 (ASTM C 76M).
1. Bell-and-spigot ends and gasketed joints with ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber
gaskets
2. Class III, Wall A.
3. Class V, Wall B.
2.4 NONPRESSURE TRANSITION COUPLINGS
A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining
underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined, and
corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
B. Sleeve Materials:
1. For Concrete Pipes: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber.
2. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.
3. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe
materials being joined.
C. Unshielded, Flexible Couplings:
1. Description: Elastomeric sleeve with stainless-steel shear ring and corrosion-resistant-
metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
12043 33 41 00 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
D. Shielded, Flexible Couplings:
1. Description: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-
resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening
mechanism on each end.
E. Ring-Type, Flexible Couplings:
1. Description: Elastomeric compression seal with dimensions to fit inside bell of larger pipe
and for spigot of smaller pipe to fit inside ring.
2.5 PRESSURE PIPE COUPLINGS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Cascade Waterworks Mfg.
2. Dresser, Inc.
3. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The); Pipe Products Div.
4. JCM Industries, Inc.
5. Romac Industries, Inc.
6. Smith-Blair, Inc.; a Sensus company.
7. Victaulic Depend-O-Lok, Inc.
8. Viking Johnson.
B. Description: AWWA C219, tubular-sleeve coupling, with center sleeve, gaskets, end rings, and
bolt fasteners.
C. Metal, bolted, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining underground pressure
piping. Include 200-psig minimum pressure rating and ends sized to fit adjoining pipes.
D. Center-Sleeve Material: Stainless steel
E. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber.
F. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material.
2.6 CLEANOUTS
A. Cast-Iron Cleanouts:
1. Description: ASME A112.36.2M, round, gray-iron housing with clamping device and
round, secured, scoriated, gray-iron cover. Include gray-iron ferrule with inside calk or
spigot connection and countersunk, tapered-thread, brass closure plug.
2. Top-Loading Classification(s): Heavy Duty.
3. Sewer Pipe Fitting and Riser to Cleanout: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron soil pipe
and fittings.
B. Plastic Cleanouts:
1. Description: PVC body with PVC threaded plug. Include PVC sewer pipe fitting and riser
to cleanout of same material as sewer piping.
12043 33 41 00 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
2.7 MANHOLES
A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes:
1. Description: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), precast, reinforced concrete, of depth
indicated, with provision for sealant joints.
2. Diameter: 48 inches (1200 mm) minimum unless otherwise indicated.
3. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section
as required to prevent flotation.
4. Base Section: 6-inch (150-mm) minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch (102-mm)
minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and separate base slab or base
section with integral floor.
5. Riser Sections: 4-inch (102-mm) minimum thickness, and lengths to provide depth
indicated.
6. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is
indicated, and top of cone of size that matches grade rings.
7. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990 (ASTM C 990M), bitumen or butyl rubber.
8. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), cast or fitted into manhole
walls, for each pipe connection.
9. Steps: FRP ladder; or ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel
reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP, wide enough to allow worker to place
both feet on one step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off step. Cast or anchor
steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch (300- to 400-mm) intervals. Omit steps if total depth
from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than 48 inches (1500 mm).
10. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking HDPE rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and
diameter matching manhole frame and cover, and of height required to adjust manhole
frame and cover to indicated elevation and slope. Include sealant recommended by ring
manufacturer.
11. Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 6- to 9-inch (150- to 225-mm) total thickness, to
match diameter of manhole frame and cover, and height as required to adjust manhole
frame and cover to indicated elevation and slope.
B. Manhole Frames and Covers:
1. As indicated on Drawings.
C. Manhole Protective Coatings:
1. All manholes (proposed or existing) with force mains (proposed or existing) discharging
into them shall be coated according to this specification.
2. Basis of Design Product: Quality of Material for protective coating of new manholes –
Sauereisen SewerGard polymer lining as distributed by Sauereisen, Pittsburgh, PA.
Other polymer coating systems of equal or better quality may be used as determined by
the Engineer.
3. The coating material shall be an impermeable, high strength, corrosion-resistant, fiber-
filled or aggregate-filled epoxy material specifically designed to protect concrete surfaces
from physical abuse. The material should prohibit water infiltration and shall be suitable
for application over damp or dry concrete surfaces without the use of a primer. The
material shall have a non-sagging consistency to permit application on vertical and
overhead surfaces and is to be installed per manufacturer’s recommendations.
2.8 CONCRETE
A. General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318, ACI 350/350R (ACI 350M/350RM), and
the following:
12043 33 41 00 - 5
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II.
2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand.
3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel.
4. Water: Potable.
B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) minimum, with 0.45 maximum
water/cementitious materials ratio.
1. Reinforcing Fabric: ASTM A 185/A 185M, steel, welded wire fabric, plain.
2. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa) deformed steel.
C. Manhole Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland cement
design mix, 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials
ratio. Include channels and benches in manholes.
1. Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of
vertical sides to three-fourths of pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth,
uniform radius and slope.
a. Invert Slope: 2 percent through manhole.
2. Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel.
a. Slope: 4 percent.
D. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) minimum, with
0.58 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio.
1. Reinforcing Fabric: ASTM A 185/A 185M, steel, welded wire fabric, plain.
2. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa) deformed steel.
2.9 CATCH BASINS
A. Standard Precast Concrete Catch Basins:
1. Description: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), precast, reinforced concrete, of depth
indicated, with provision for sealant joints.
2. Base Section: 6-inch (150-mm) minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch (102-mm)
minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and separate base slab or base
section with integral floor.
3. Riser Sections: 4-inch (102-mm) minimum thickness, 48-inch (1200-mm) diameter, and
lengths to provide depth indicated.
4. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is
indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings.
5. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990 (ASTM C 990M), bitumen or butyl rubber.
6. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and shape
matching catch basin frame and grate. Include sealant recommended by ring
manufacturer.
7. Grade Rings: Include two or three reinforced-concrete rings, of 6- to 9-inch (150- to 225-
mm) total thickness, that match 24-inch- (610-mm-) diameter frame and grate.
8. Steps: Individual FRP steps; FRP ladder; or ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2-inch
(13-mm) steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP, wide enough to allow
worker to place both feet on one step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off step.
Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch (300- to 400-mm) intervals. Omit
12043 33 41 00 - 6
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
steps if total depth from floor of catch basin to finished grade is less than 48 inches (1500
mm).
9. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), resilient, of size required, for each pipe
connecting to base section.
B. Frames and Grates: As indicated on Drawings.
2.10 STORMWATER INLETS
A. Curb Inlets: As indicated on Drawings.
B. Frames and Grates: Heavy duty, as indicated on Drawings.
2.11 PIPE OUTLETS
A. Head Walls: Cast-in-place reinforced concrete, as indicated on Drawings.
B. Riprap Aprons: Broken, irregularly sized and shaped, graded stone according to NSSGA's
"Quarried Stone for Erosion and Sediment Control."
1. Average Size: 6 inches unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and
arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout
take into account design considerations. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where
specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken
continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves,
and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements,
and other installation requirements.
C. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch
connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.
D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of
pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
E. When installing pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed, use pipe-
jacking process of microtunneling.
F. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following:
12043 33 41 00 - 7
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow.
2. Install piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger with restrained joints at tee fittings and at
changes in direction. Use corrosion-resistant rods, pipe or fitting manufacturer's
proprietary restraint system, or cast-in-place concrete supports or anchors.
3. Install piping with 24-inch (915-mm) minimum cover.
4. Install PE corrugated sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321.
5. Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.
6. Install reinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 1479 and ACPA's
"Concrete Pipe Installation Manual."
G. Install force-main pressure piping according to the following:
1. Install piping with restrained joints at tee fittings and at horizontal and vertical changes in
direction. Use corrosion-resistant rods, pipe or fitting manufacturer's proprietary restraint
system, or cast-in-place concrete supports or anchors.
2. Install piping with 48 inch minimum cover.
3. Install PVC pressure piping according to AWWA M23, or ASTM D 2774 and
ASTM F 1668.
3.3 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following:
1. Join corrugated PE piping according to ASTM D 3212 for push-on joints.
2. Join PVC corrugated sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 for elastomeric-seal joints.
3. Join reinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation
Manual" for rubber-gasketed joints.
4. Join dissimilar pipe materials with nonpressure-type flexible couplings.
B. Join force-main pressure piping according to the following:
1. Join PVC pressure piping according to AWWA M23 for gasketed joints.
2. Join dissimilar pipe materials with pressure-type couplings.
3.4 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION
A. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Use cast-iron soil
pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and cast-iron soil pipe for riser extensions
to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe.
1. Use Heavy-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in all areas (both paved and
unpaved).
B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 inches
(450 by 450 by 300 mm) deep. Set with tops 1 inch (25 mm) above surrounding earth grade.
C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement and roads with tops flush with pavement
surface.
3.5 MANHOLE INSTALLATION
A. General: Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated.
12043 33 41 00 - 8
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
B. Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891.
C. Where specific manhole construction is not indicated, follow manhole manufacturer's written
instructions.
D. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements.
Set tops 3 inches (76 mm) above finished surface elsewhere unless otherwise indicated.
3.6 CATCH BASIN INSTALLATION
A. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated.
3.7 STORMWATER INLET AND OUTLET INSTALLATION
A. Construct inlet head walls, aprons, and sides of reinforced concrete, as indicated.
B. Construct riprap of broken stone, as indicated.
C. Install outlets that spill onto grade, anchored with concrete, where indicated.
D. Install outlets that spill onto grade, with flared end sections that match pipe, where indicated.
3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318.
3.9 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect nonpressure, gravity-flow drainage piping in building's storm building drains specified
in Division 22 Section "Facility Storm Drainage Piping."
B. Make connections to existing piping and underground manholes.
1. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove
section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye
fitting, plus 6-inch (150-mm) overlap, with not less than 6 inches (150 mm) of concrete
with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20.7 MPa).
2. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 4 to NPS 20 (DN 100 to
DN 500). Remove section of existing pipe, install wye fitting into existing piping, and
encase entire wye with not less than 6 inches (150 mm) of concrete with 28-day
compressive strength of 3000 psi (20.7 MPa).
3. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 21 (DN 525) or larger, or to
underground manholes and structures by cutting into existing unit and creating an
opening large enough to allow 3 inches (76 mm) of concrete to be packed around
entering connection. Cut end of connection pipe passing through pipe or structure wall to
conform to shape of and be flush with inside wall unless otherwise indicated. On outside
of pipe, manhole, or structure wall, encase entering connection in 6 inches (150 mm) of
concrete for minimum length of 12 inches (300 mm) to provide additional support of collar
from connection to undisturbed ground.
12043 33 41 00 - 9
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
a. Use concrete that will attain a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 4000 psi
(20.7 MPa) unless otherwise indicated.
b. Use epoxy-bonding compound as interface between new and existing concrete
and piping materials.
4. Protect existing piping, manholes, and structures to prevent concrete or debris from
entering while making tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that
may accumulate.
C. Pipe couplings and expansion joints with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be
used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use nonpressure-type flexible couplings where required to join gravity-flow, nonpressure
sewer piping unless otherwise indicated.
a. Shielded flexible couplings for same or minor difference OD pipes.
b. Unshielded, increaser/reducer-pattern, flexible couplings for pipes with different
OD.
c. Ring-type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular space
between smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits installation.
2. Use pressure-type pipe couplings for force main joints.
3.10 CLOSING ABANDONED STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
A. Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping indicated to remain in
place. Include closures strong enough to withstand hydrostatic and earth pressures that may
result after ends of abandoned piping have been closed. Use either procedure below:
1. Close open ends of piping with at least 8-inch- thick, brick masonry bulkheads.
2. Close open ends of piping with threaded metal caps, plastic plugs, or other acceptable
methods suitable for size and type of material being closed. Do not use wood plugs.
B. Abandoned Manholes and Structures: Excavate around manholes and structures as required
and use one procedure below:
1. Remove manhole or structure and close open ends of remaining piping.
2. Remove top of manhole or structure down to at least 36 inches below final grade. Fill to
within 12 of top with stone, rubble, gravel, or compacted dirt. Fill to top with concrete.
C. Backfill to grade according to Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
3.11 IDENTIFICATION
A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." Arrange for
installation of green warning tape directly over piping and at outside edge of underground
structures.
1. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground
structures.
12043 33 41 00 - 10
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred.
Inspect after approximately 24 inches (610 mm) of backfill is in place, and again at completion
of Project.
1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection.
2. Defects requiring correction include the following:
a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures.
b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder
of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.
c. Damage: Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.
d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping.
e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.
3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are
within allowances specified.
4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.
B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or
repaired, for leaks and defects.
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval.
2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours'
advance notice.
4. Submit separate report for each test.
5. Gravity-Flow Storm Drainage Piping: Test according to requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction, UNI-B-6, and the following:
a. Exception: Piping with soiltight joints unless required by authorities having
jurisdiction.
b. Option: Test plastic piping according to ASTM F 1417.
c. Option: Test concrete piping according to ASTM C 924 (ASTM C 924M).
6. Force-Main Storm Drainage Piping: Perform hydrostatic test after thrust blocks,
supports, and anchors have hardened. Test at pressure not less than 1-1/2 times the
maximum system operating pressure, but not less than 150 psig.
a. Ductile-Iron Piping: Test according to AWWA C600, "Hydraulic Testing" Section.
b. PVC Piping: Test according to AWWA M23, "Testing and Maintenance" Chapter.
C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within
allowances specified.
END OF SECTION 33 41 00
12043 33 46 00 - 1
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SUBDRAINAGE
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
SECTION 33 46 00 - SUBDRAINAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Perforated-wall pipe and fittings.
2. Geotextile filter fabrics.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For geotextile filter fabrics.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORATED-WALL PIPES AND FITTINGS
A. Perforated PE Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 405 or AASHTO M 252, Type CP; corrugated, for
coupled joints.
2.2 SOIL MATERIALS
A. Soil materials are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
2.3 WATERPROOFING FELTS
A. Material: Comply with ASTM D 226, Type I, asphalt or ASTM D 227, coal-tar-saturated organic
felt.
2.4 GEOTEXTILE FILTER FABRICS
A. Description: Fabric of PP or polyester fibers or combination of both, with flow rate range from
110 to 330 gpm/sq. ft. (4480 to 13 440 L/min. per sq. m) when tested according to
ASTM D 4491.
B. Structure Type: Nonwoven, needle-punched continuous filament.
1. Survivability: AASHTO M 288 Class 2.
2. Styles: Flat and sock.
12043 33 46 00 - 2
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SUBDRAINAGE
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
3.2 FOUNDATION DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
A. Place impervious fill material on subgrade adjacent to bottom of footing after concrete footing
forms have been removed. Place and compact impervious fill to dimensions indicated, but not
less than 6 inches (150 mm) deep and 12 inches (300 mm) wide.
B. Lay flat-style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides.
C. Place supporting layer of drainage course over compacted subgrade and geotextile filter fabric,
to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches (100 mm).
D. Encase pipe with sock-style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock sections
with adhesive or tape.
E. Install drainage piping as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Installation" Article for foundation
subdrainage.
F. Add drainage course to width of at least 6 inches (150 mm) on side away from wall and to top of
pipe to perform tests.
G. After satisfactory testing, cover drainage piping to width of at least 6 inches (150 mm) on side
away from footing and above top of pipe to within 12 inches (300 mm) of finish grade.
H. Install drainage course and wrap top of drainage course with flat-style geotextile filter fabric.
I. Place layer of flat-style geotextile filter fabric over top of drainage course, overlapping edges at
least 4 inches (100 mm).
J. Place backfill material over compacted drainage course. Place material in loose-depth layers
not exceeding 6 inches (150 mm). Thoroughly compact each layer. Final backfill to finish
elevations and slope away from building.
3.3 UNDERSLAB DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
A. Excavate for underslab drainage system after subgrade material has been compacted but
before drainage course has been placed. Include horizontal distance of at least 6 inches (150
mm) between drainage pipe and trench walls. Grade bottom of trench excavations to required
slope, and compact to firm, solid bed for drainage system.
B. Lay flat-style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides.
C. Place supporting layer of drainage course over compacted subgrade and geotextile filter fabric,
to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches (100 mm).
D. Encase pipe with sock-style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock sections
with adhesive or tape.
12043 33 46 00 - 3
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SUBDRAINAGE
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
E. Install drainage piping as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Installation" Article for underslab
subdrainage.
F. Add drainage course to width of at least 6 inches (150 mm) on side away from wall and to top of
pipe to perform tests.
G. After satisfactory testing, cover drainage piping with drainage course to elevation of bottom of
slab, and compact and wrap top of drainage course with flat-style geotextile filter fabric.
3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install piping beginning at low points of system, true to grades and alignment indicated, with
unbroken continuity of invert. Bed piping with full bearing in filtering material. Install gaskets,
seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions and other
requirements indicated.
1. Foundation Subdrainage: Install piping level and with a minimum cover of 36 inches
unless otherwise indicated.
2. Underslab Subdrainage: Install piping level.
3. Retaining-Wall Subdrainage: When water discharges at end of wall into stormwater
piping system, install piping level and with a minimum cover of 24 inches unless
otherwise indicated.
4. Lay perforated pipe with perforations down.
5. Excavate recesses in trench bottom for bell ends of pipe. Lay pipe with bells facing
upslope and with spigot end entered fully into adjacent bell.
B. Use increasers, reducers, and couplings made for different sizes or materials of pipes and
fittings being connected. Reduction of pipe size in direction of flow is prohibited.
C. Install thermoplastic piping according to ASTM D 2321.
3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join perforated PE pipe and fittings with couplings according to ASTM D 3212 with loose
banded, coupled, or push-on joints.
B. Special Pipe Couplings: Join piping made of different materials and dimensions with special
couplings made for this application. Use couplings that are compatible with and fit materials
and dimensions of both pipes.
3.6 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Division 33 Section "Storm Utility Drainage
Piping."
B. Cleanouts for Subdrainage:
1. Install cleanouts from piping to grade. Locate cleanouts at beginning of piping run and at
changes in direction. Install fittings so cleanouts open in direction of flow in piping.
2. In vehicular-traffic areas, use minimum NPS 4 (DN 100) cast-iron soil pipe and fittings for
piping branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout. Set cleanout frames and covers in
12043 33 46 00 - 4
THE OLIVIA ON MAIN SUBDRAINAGE
BID PACKAGE NO. 1 ISSUED: 11/21/2014
a cast-in-place concrete anchor, 18 by 18 by 12 inches (450 by 450 by 300 mm) deep.
Set top of cleanout flush with grade.
3. In nonvehicular-traffic areas, use minimum NPS 4 (DN 100) PVC pipe and fittings for
piping branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout. Set cleanout frames and covers in
a cast-in-place concrete anchor, 12 by 12 by 4 inches (300 by 300 by 100 mm) deep.
Set top of cleanout 1 inch (25 mm) > above grade.
4. Comply with requirements for concrete specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 33 Section "Storm Utility Drainage
Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Connect low elevations of subdrainage and foundation drain system to solid-wall-piping storm
drainage system.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing drainage course to top of piping, test drain piping with water to ensure free
flow before backfilling.
2. Remove obstructions, replace damaged components, and repeat test until results are
satisfactory.
B. Drain piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Clear interior of installed piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as work
progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place
plugs in ends of uncompleted pipe at end of each day or when work stops.
END OF SECTION 33 46 00